Menu

Mark 8:6 — Word Study

Depth

N1904καὶ παραγγέλλει τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ λαβὼν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους, εὐχαριστήσας ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ἵνα παρατιθῶσιν· καὶ παρέθηκαν τῷ ὄχλῳ.

BSAAndkai He directsparangellō [ordered, commanded] theho crowdochlos [multitude, large group of people] to reclineanapiptō [recline, lean back] onepi theho ground, [earth, soil] Andkai having takenlambanō [received, accepted] theho sevenhepta [complete, perfect number] loaves,artos [bread, food] having given thankseucharisteō [expressed gratitude, was thankful] He broke [them]klaō [shared, distributed] andkai he was giving [them]didōmi to theho disciplesmathētēs [learners, followers] of Himautos thathina they may set before [them];paratithēmi [present, offer to, crowd, multitude] Andkai they set [it]paratithēmi [handed out, served] before theho crowd.ochlos [large group, assembly]

Word
Listen & take awayMark 8
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 6 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (ochlos) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Mark 8:6quick helps
In a sentenceJesus instructs the crowd to sit down, takes seven loaves, gives thanks, breaks them, and distributes them through His disciples.
Who is speakingJesus, addressing the crowd and His disciples.
Where we areThe feeding of the 4,000, a significant miracle demonstrating Jesus' compassion.
The hard wordπαραγγέλλει
Take awayJesus provides for the needs of the people through His disciples.
6 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Trapp, Ellicott & more — read them › clause subjectλαμβάνω verbπαραγγέλλω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Mark 8:6

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Feeding of the 4,000generated

5“How many loaves do you have?” Jesus asked. “Seven,” they replied.
6And He instructed the crowd to sit down on the ground. Then He took the seven loaves, gave thanks and broke them, and gave them to His disciples to set before the people. And they distributed them to the crowd.
7They also had a few small fish, and Jesus blessed them and ordered that these be set before them as well.
8The people ate and were satisfied, and the disciples picked up seven basketfuls of broken pieces that were left over.

Mark 8:6 describes a moment when Jesus, moved by compassion for the crowd, performed a miracle by feeding them with seven loaves of bread. This act not only satisfied their physical hunger but also demonstrated His authority and care for the people. The surrounding verses provide context, showing the disciples' concern for the crowd's needs and Jesus' miraculous provision, similar to the earlier feeding of the 5,000.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Mark 6:39–40Then Jesus directed them to have the people sit in groups on the green grass.
2Matthew 14:18–19“Bring them here to Me,” Jesus said.
3Matthew 15:35–36And He instructed the crowd to sit down on the ground.
4Luke 9:14–15(There were about five thousand men.) He told His disciples, “Have them sit down in groups of about fifty each.”
5Luke 12:37Blessed are those servants whom the master finds on watch when he returns. Truly I tell you, he will dress himself to serve and will have them recline at the table, and he himself will come and wait on them.

The Key Word παραγγέλλει, parangellōgenerated

The verb παραγγέλλω (parangellō) means to command or order, indicating authority in giving instructions. It is derived from the root words meaning 'beside' and 'to announce,' suggesting a transmission of orders or messages.

In this verse, Jesus exercises His authority by instructing the crowd to sit down, emphasizing His role as a leader and provider. The aorist tense indicates a completed action, showing that His command was immediate and decisive.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The Berean Standard Bible translates the verse with 'He instructed the crowd to sit down on the ground,' which is echoed in the KJV with 'he commanded the people to sit down on the ground.' Both emphasize Jesus' authority in issuing commands.

Where the translations differ is in the rendering of ὄχλῳ. The BSB and BBE use 'crowd,' while the ASV and YLT opt for 'multitude.' This reflects slight variations in how the size and nature of the gathering are perceived.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the sentence is παραγγέλλει, He directs, which governs the instruction to the crowd. The structure includes several clauses that detail the actions taken by Jesus and the disciples.

The sentence flows from Jesus' command to the actions that follow: the crowd sitting down, the taking and breaking of the loaves, and the distribution to the crowd, illustrating a clear sequence of events.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

ὄχλος is used in the Septuagint to translate various Hebrew terms related to gatherings of people, such as חַ֫יִל (H2428), which denotes strength or a multitude. This connection enriches our understanding of the crowd Jesus addressed.

The word παρατίθημι in the Septuagint also appears in contexts of setting before or presenting, similar to its usage in this verse, indicating a continuity in the theme of provision and care.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Mark 8:6 describes how Jesus instructed the crowd to sit down on the ground. He took seven loaves, gave thanks, broke them, and gave them to His disciples to distribute to the people. This miracle shows Jesus' compassion and ability to provide for the needs of the crowd.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does it mean that Jesus instructed the crowd to sit down?

Jesus' instruction to sit down signifies His authority and the organization of the meal that was about to take place, demonstrating His care for the crowd.

Why did Jesus give thanks before breaking the bread?

Giving thanks before meals is a common practice in Jewish tradition, reflecting gratitude to God for His provision.

What is the significance of the seven loaves?

The number seven often symbolizes completeness in the Bible, suggesting that Jesus' provision was sufficient for the needs of the crowd.

How did the disciples participate in the miracle?

The disciples played a crucial role by distributing the loaves to the crowd, illustrating their involvement in Jesus' ministry and the sharing of His blessings.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. How can I recognize and respond to the needs of those around me, just as Jesus did?
  2. In what ways can I express gratitude for the provisions in my life?
  3. How does Jesus' act of breaking bread relate to my understanding of community and sharing?
  4. What role do I play in sharing the blessings I receive with others?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Several early church Fathers reflect on this passage, drawing lessons from Jesus' actions in the feeding of the 4,000.

Augustine of HippoSERMONS ON NEW TESTAMENT LESSONS 45.1 354–430
In expounding holy Scriptures, I am, so to speak, now breaking bread for you. If you hunger to receive it, your heart will sing out with the fullness of praise.
Early Church Fathers on Mark 8 →
BedeOn the Gospel of Mark c. 673–735
And he commanded the crowd to recline on the ground. Earlier, during the feeding of the five loaves, the crowd reclined on the green grass;
Early Church Fathers on Mark 8 →
BedeOn the Gospel of Mark c. 673–735
And taking the seven loaves, giving thanks, he broke them and gave to his disciples to set before the crowd. The Lord, taking the loaves, gave them to his disciples so that they might distribute them to the crowd, because,
Early Church Fathers on Mark 8 →

Commentators on this verse — 6 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Mark 8:6 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And he commanded the people to sit down on the ground,.... [See comments on Matthew 15:35]; and he took the seven loaves, and gave thanks, and brake them; [See comments on Matthew 15:36]; and gave to

Read John Gill on Mark 8 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And he commanded the people to sit down on the ground: and he took the seven loaves, and gave thanks, and brake, and gave to his disciples to set before them; and they did set them before the people.

Read Robert Jamieson on Mark 8 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

6 And he commanded the people to sit down on the ground: and he took the seven loaves, and gave thanks, and brake, and gave to his disciples to set before them; and they did set them before the people. Ver. 6.

Read John Trapp on Mark 8 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(6) To sit down.—The Greek word implies the usual Eastern position of reclining, rather than our sitting.

Read Charles John Ellicott on Mark 8 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

6. to sit down] Where is not distinctly specified. All we can certainly gather is that it was on the eastern side of the Lake, and in a desert spot (Matthew 15:33), possibly about the middle or southern end of the Lake.

Read Cambridge on Mark 8 →
Daniel Denison Whedon1808–1885Whedon's Commentary on the Bible

§ 69. — THE FEEDING THE FOUR , Mark 8:1-9.(See notes on Matthew 15:32-38.)

Read Daniel Denison Whedon on Mark 8 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

And He instructed the crowd to sit down on the ground. Then He took the seven loaves, gave thanks and broke them, and gave them to His disciples to set before the people. And they distributed them to the crowd.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

He commanded the multitude to sit down on the ground, and he took the seven loaves. Having given thanks, he broke them and gave them to his disciples to serve, and they served the multitude.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

And He instructed the crowd to sit down on the ground. Then He took the seven loaves, gave thanks and broke them, and gave them to His disciples to set before the people. And they distributed them to the crowd.

NETBNew English Translation2006

Then he directed the crowd to sit down on the ground. After he took the seven loaves and gave thanks, he broke them and began giving them to the disciples to serve. So they served the crowd.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And he commanded the people to sit down on the ground: and he took the seven loaves, and gave thanks, and brake, and gave to his disciples to set before them; and they did set them before the people.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And he commandeth the multitude to sit down on the ground: and he took the seven loaves, and having given thanks, he brake, and gave to his disciples, to set before them; and they set them before the multitude.

RVARevised Version, American1894

And he commandeth the multitude to sit down on the ground: and he took the seven loaves, and having given thanks, he brake, and gave to his disciples, to set before them; and they set them before the multitude.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And he commanded the people to sit down on the ground: and he took the seven loaves, and gave thanks, and broke, and gave to his disciples to set before them ; and they set them before the people.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

Then he commanded the multitude to sit downe on the grounde: and hee tooke the seuen loaues, and gaue thankes, brake them, and gaue to his disciples to set before them, and they did set them before the people.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

And he commanded the crowd to sit down on the ground. And having taken the seven loaves, he gave thanks, and broke [them] and gave [them] to his disciples, that they might set [them] before [them]; and they set [them] before the crowd.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

And he commanded the multitude to sit down upon the ground, and having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks, he brake, and was giving to his disciples that they may set before [them]; and they did set before the multitude.

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

And He commanded the multitude to sit down on the ground, and having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks, He broke, and was giving to His disciples that they may set before [them]; and they set before the multitude.

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

He commanded the crowd to sit down on the ground. He took the seven loaves, gave thanks, and broke them. He gave them to his disciples to set before them, and they set them before the crowd.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And taking the seven loaves, giving thanks, he broke, and gave to his disciples for to set before them; and they set them before the people.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

He told the crowd to sit down on the ground. Then he took the seven loaves of bread, and gave thanks. He broke the bread and handed the pieces to his disciples to give to the crowd.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And he made the people be seated on the earth: and he took the seven cakes and, having given praise, he gave the broken bread to his disciples to put before them; and they put it before the people.

Word by word, the decisions they made

παραγγέλλειparangellō He directs G3853 2 different renderings
commandedDBY GNV KJV LSV NWB ULB WEB YLT
he instructedBSB MSB
ὄχλῳochlos crowd G3793 3 different renderings
peopleBBE BSB DRA KJV MSB NWB
multitudeASV GNV LSV RVA WEB YLT
crowdDBY FBV NETB ULB
γῆς, ground, G1093 2 different renderings
groundASV BSB DBY FBV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
earthBBE
λαβὼνlambanō having taken G2983 2 different renderings
tookASV BBE BSB FBV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
having takenDBY LSV YLT
ἄρτους,artos loaves, G740 2 different renderings
loavesASV BSB DBY DRA FBV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
breadBBE
εὐχαριστήσαςeucharisteō having given thanks G2168 3 different renderings
having given thanksASV LSV RVA WEB YLT
he gave thanksDBY
giving thanksDRA

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseκαὶAndclauseverbπαραγγέλλειHe directsnoun phrase · indirect objectτῷtheὄχλῳcrowdclause · objectverbἀναπεσεῖνto reclineprepositional phrase · adverbialἐπὶonnoun phraseτῆςtheγῆςgroundclauseκαὶAndclauseclauseclauseclause · adverbialverbλαβὼνhaving takennoun phrase · objectτοὺςthenoun phraseἑπτὰsevenἄρτουςloavesadverbialεὐχαριστήσαςhaving given thanksverbἔκλασενHe broke [them]καὶandclauseverbἐδίδουkept giving [them]noun phrase · indirect objectτοῖςtonoun phraseμαθηταῖςdisciplesαὐτοῦof Himclauseἵναthatclauseverbπαρατιθῶσινthey might set before [them]καὶAndclauseverbπαρέθηκανthey set [it] beforenoun phrase · indirect objectτῷtheὄχλῳcrowd

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Et præcepit turbæ discumbere super terram. Et accipiens septem panes, gratias agens fregit, et dabat discipulis suis ut apponerent, et apposuerunt turbæ.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܦܩܕ ܠܟܢܫܐ ܕܢܣܬܡܟܘܢ ܥܠ ܐܪܥܐ ܘܢܣܒ ܗܢܘܢ ܫܒܥܐ ܠܚܡܝܢ ܘܒܪܟ ܘܩܨܐ ܘܝܗܒ ܠܬܠܡܝܕܘܗܝ ܕܢܣܝܡܘܢ ܘܣܡܘ ܠܟܢܫܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καὶ παραγγέλλει τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ λαβὼν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους, εὐχαριστήσας ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ἵνα παρατιθῶσιν· καὶ παρέθηκαν τῷ ὄχλῳ.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καὶ παραγγέλλει τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ λαβὼν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους, εὐχαριστήσας ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ἵνα παρατιθῶσιν· καὶ παρέθηκαν τῷ ὄχλῳ.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

καὶ παραγγέλλει τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ λαβὼν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους, εὐχαριστήσας ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ἵνα παρατιθῶσιν· καὶ παρέθηκαν τῷ ὄχλῳ.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

καὶ παραγγέλλει τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ λαβὼν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους, εὐχαριστήσας ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ἵνα παρατιθῶσιν· καὶ παρέθηκαν τῷ ὄχλῳ.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

καὶ παραγγέλλει τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ λαβὼν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους, εὐχαριστήσας ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ἵνα παρατιθῶσιν· καὶ παρέθηκαν τῷ ὄχλῳ.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

καὶ παραγγέλλει τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ λαβὼν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους, εὐχαριστήσας ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ἵνα παρατιθῶσιν· καὶ παρέθηκαν τῷ ὄχλῳ.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

καὶ τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ λαβὼν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους, εὐχαριστήσας ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ἵνα καὶ παρέθηκαν τῷ ὄχλῳ.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

καὶ τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ λαβὼν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους, εὐχαριστήσας ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ἵνα καὶ παρέθηκαν τῷ ὄχλῳ.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
παραγγέλλει He directsNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, TregTR, Byz
παρατιθῶσιν· they may set before [them];NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, TregTR, Byz

Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Mark 8:6καίAndAndκαίπαραγγέλλωHe directsHe directsπαραγγέλλωthetheὄχλοςcrowdcrowdὄχλοςἀναπίπτωto reclineto reclineἀναπίπτωἐπίononἐπίthetheγῆground,ground,γῆκαίAndAndκαίλαμβάνωhaving takehaving takenλαμβάνωthetheἑπτάsevensevenἑπτάἄρτοςloaves,loaves,ἄρτοςεὐχαριστέωhaving givehaving given thεὐχαριστέωκλάωHe broke [tHe broke [them]κλάωκαίandandκαίδίδωμιhe was givihe was giving [δίδωμιto theto theμαθητήςdisciplesdisciplesμαθητήςαὐτόςof Himof Himαὐτόςἵναthatthatἵναπαρατίθημιthey may sethey may set beπαρατίθημικαίAndAndκαίπαρατίθημιthey set [ithey set [it]παρατίθημιbefore thebefore theὄχλοςcrowd.crowd.ὄχλοςπαράPrep. fromPrep. from, in παράἔχωv. I have,v. I have, holdἔχωἀνάPrep. and,Prep. and, apieἀνάαἴρωv. I raisev. I raise, lifαἴρωεὐχάριστοςAdj thankfAdj thankful, gεὐχάριστοςμανθάνωv. I learnv. I learn, ascμανθάνωἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦδέχομαιv. I take,v. I take, receδέχομαιαἱρέωv. I choosv. I choose, prαἱρέωἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρArticle thArticle theκλάωv. I breakv. I breakκλάωσπλαγχνίζομαιv. I have v. I have pity σπλαγχνίζομαιἱκανόςAdj sufficAdj sufficient,ἱκανόςπαραβολήn.f. a parn.f. a parable,παραβολήἀναπίπτωv. I lie dv. I lie down, ἀναπίπτωμηδείςAdj no oneAdj no one, notμηδείςπρασιάn.f. a comn.f. a company πρασιά
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Mark 8:6

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίAnd8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
παραγγέλλειparangellō He directs G3853 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
31× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To order or command someone to do something, as seen in Acts 15:5 and 1 Corinthians 11:17. This word means to transmit a message or instruction. It is used when Jesus gives commands to his disciples in Matthew 10:5.
Amplified meaning
ordered, commanded
Tyndale gloss
to order
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

παραγγέλλω is built from παρά and ἀγγέλλω, meaning to transmit a message or to command. It covers a range of meanings from notifying to ordering, often seen in contexts of authority or instruction. In the New Testament, it appears in verses like Matthew 10:5 and 1 Timothy 6:13. Notably, some lexicons suggest a distinction in strength between παραγγέλλω and similar verbs like κελεύω.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παρ-αγγέλλω

(< παρά, ἀγγὲλλω),

[in LXX for שׁמע pi., hi., etc.;]

to transmit a message (Æsch., Eur.).

to order, command (Hdt., Xen., al.): c. inf., Ac 15:5; c. acc. rei, I Co 11:17, II Th 3:4, I Ti 4:11 5:7; seq. ἵνα (M, Pr., 207; Bl., § 69, 4), Mk 6:8, II Th 3:12; c. dat. pers., Ac 17:30 R, txt., I Th 4:11; seq. λέγων, Mt 10:5; c. inf. aor.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρ-αγγέλλω ; impf. παρήγγελλον ; 1 aor. παρήγγειλα; (παρά and ἀγγέλλω) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; ik prop. to transmit a message along from one to another [(cf. παρά, IV. 1)], to declare, announce. 2. to command, order, charge: w. dat. of the pers. 1 Th. iv. 11 [ef. Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion ᾽] ; foll. by λέγων and direct dise. Mt. x. 5; foll. by an inf. aor., Mt. xv.35 LT Tr WH; Mk. viii. 6; Lk. viii. 29; Acts x.42; xvi. 18; with μή inserted, Lk. v. 14; viii. 56; Acts xxiii. 22; 1 Co. vii. 10 [here Lehm. inf. pres.] ; foll. by an inf. pres., Acts xvi. 23; xvii.30 [here T Tr mrg. WH have ἀπαγγ.}; 2 Th. iii. 6; with μή inserted, Lk. ix. 21 [GL T Tr WH]; Acts i. 4; iv. 18; v.28 (παραγγελίᾳ παραγγέλλειν, to charge strictly, W. §54, 3; B.184 (199 sq.)), 40; 1 Tim. i. 3; vi. 17; τινί τι, 2 Th. iii. 4 [but T Tr WH om. L br. the dat.]; τοῦτο foll. by ὅτι, 2 Th. iii. 10…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παραγγέλλω is common in Ptolemaic papyri to describe the official summons before a court, e.g. P Par 4617 (B.c. 153) (= UPZ i. p. 338) γέγραφά σοι, ὅπω[ς] ᾿Απολλωνίωι παραγγείληις, P Grenf I. 40° (ii/B.c.) (= Chres¢. IL. p. 27) ἔκρινον γράψαι σοι ὅπως εἰδὼς παραγγείλης καὶ τοῖς] ἄλλοις ἱερεῦσι ἑτοίμους εἶναι, and P Tebt I. 14° (B.c. 114) ἔγραψας ἡμῖν “Hpav (/. “Hpart) . . . εὐθυνομένωι δὲ φόνωι καὶ ἄλλαις αἰτία ζιὃς παραγγεῖλαι ἀπαντᾶν ἐν ἡμέραι (ς) τρισὶν πρὸς τὴν περὶ τούτων ἐσομένην διεξαγωγήν, “‘you wrote to me that I was to give notice t» Heras who is arraigned for murder and other offences to appear in three days’ time for the decision to be made concerning these charges” (Edd.). Miscellaneous uses of the verb are—P Amh II. 30% (ii/B.c.) παρηγγείλαμεν τῆι Θεμβῶτος (/. Θεμβῶτι) ἐκχωρεῖν ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας, “‘we ordered Thembos to depart out of the house,’” P Tebt 11. 3862 (B.c. 12) ἐν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παραγγέλλω (parangellō) — to order.

παραγγ-έλλω,

future -ελῶ: aorist 2 infinitive passive παραγγελῆναι [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—pass on or transmit a message, σέλας παραγγείλασα Μακίστου σκοπαῖς (nisi to be read παρηγγάρευσε) [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. give orders, give the word of command, especially of a general, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τισὶ ὅπως with future, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. ὅπως ἂν.. give orders to the end that.., [Refs]: with accusative of things only, order, π. παρασκευὴν σίτου order corn to be supplied, [NT+5th c.BC+]passive, τὰ παραγγελλόμενα orders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. recommend, exhort (not so strong as κελεύω), π. τινὶ πράσσειν τι [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

παραγγέλλω

paraggello

from 3844 and the base of 32; to transmit a message, i.e. (by

implication) to enjoin:--(give in) charge, (give) command(-ment),

declare.

see GREEK for 3844

see GREEK for 32

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παραγγέλλω

v.

I notify, command, charge

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παραγγέλλω parangellō 32x

to announce, notify; to command, direct, charge, Mt. 10:5; Mk. 6:8, 8:6; Lk. 9:21; to charge, entreat solemnly, 1 Tim. 6:13

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παραγγέλλω fut. ελῶ aor1 -ήγγειλα perf. -ήγγελκα to transmit as a message, as by telegraph, παραγγείλασα σέλας Aesch.; μνήμην παραγγέλλοντες ὧν ἐκύρσατε Eur.; π. τὸ σύνθημα to pass on the watchword, Xen.

generally, to give the word, give orders, of the general, Hdt., Aesch., etc.; π. τινὶ ποιεῖν τι Hdt., Xen., etc.:—Pass., τὰ παραγγελλόμενα military orders, Thuc.; so, τὰ παρηγγελμένα Xen.

to order, recommend, exhort, π. τινὶ ποιεῖν τι Soph., etc.; τί τινι Eur.; ὅπως ἂν . . , to give orders to the end that . . , Plat.:—c. acc. rei only, to order, π. παρασκευὴν σίτου to order corn to be prepared, Lat. imperare frumentum, Hdt.; π. σιτία Thuc.; στρατείαν Aeschin.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
16%he instructed
he instructed16% · 5×having instructed9% · 3×they commanded6% · 2×we commanded6% · 2×we command6% · 2×do command6% · 2×command3% · 1×i command3% · 1×other renderings44% · 14×

32 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 22 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ἐπιτιμάωI rebuke, chide,καλέωI call, invite,
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theοὗτος
σύ
πρόςκαθώςjust as, as
οὗτος
σύκαίand, even, also,
παραγγέλλωHe directs31×
what comes after →
αὐτός
μηδείςno one, nothingλέγωI say, speakἵναin order that, s
Article the
ὄχλοςa crowdπερίδεσμοφύλαξa keeper of a pr
σύ
μήNegἐνὅτιthat, since, bec
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theποιέωI do, makeπαρακαλέωI summon, entrea
μηδείςno one, nothing
λέγωI say, speakἐκλαλέωI speak out, dis

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαραγγέλλω · 31× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Timothy 2 Thessalonians Luke Mark 1 Corinthians Matthew 1 Thessalonians
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.100c. AD 40

εἰ γὰρ ἀπὸ παντὸς ἐσθίειν παραγγέλλει τῶν ἐν τῷ παραδείσῳ, ἀπὸ δὲ τούτου μὴ φαγεῖν, δῆλον ὅτι οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν τῷ παραδείσῳ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 5.1c. AD 75–95

Μωυσέος δὲ τὸν προειρημένον τρόπον ἐξ ἀνθρώπων ἀπογεγονότος Ἰησοῦς ἁπάντων ἤδη τῶν ἐπʼ αὐτῷ νενομισμένων τέλος ἐχόντων καὶ τοῦ πένθους λελωφηκότος παρήγγειλεν ἐπὶ στρατείαν ἕτοιμον εἶναι τὸ πλῆθος,

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 27.2c. AD 96

παραγγείλας μὴ ψεύδεσθαι, πολλῷ μᾶλλον αὐτὸς οὐ ψεύσεται: οὐδὲν γὰρ ἀδύνατον παρὰ τῷ θεῷ εἰ μὴ τὸ ψεύσασθαι.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 8th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Fay. 91Euhemeria (Arsinoites)AD 99

δραχμὰς δέκα ἕξ , καὶ παρεμβαλῶ ἐν τῷ ἐλαιουργίῳ ἀφʼ ἧς ἡμέρας ἐάν μοι παραγγείλῃς λαμβάνουσα παρὰ σοῦ Λουκίου τοὺς μισθοὺς ἐπὶ τῶν ὁμοίων παρεμβαλλουσῶν καὶ ἕκαστα ποιήσω καθὼς

P.Giss. 1 87Apollonopolites HeptakomiasAD 113–AD 120

λακ … ς ἀπονοίαι χρῶνται … τον τοις καὶ ἂν αὐτοὶ βλάπτωνται … παραγγέλλειν ἀνακοπῆναι … … ν σα … δε ἀμφισβητεῖν ἀλ… τε κατὰ πόλιν· ἐν δὲ

P.Wisc. 1 33ArsinoitesAD 147

ἄκρον ἐκδικίας τύχω. ἀντίγραφον τῆς ὑπογραφῆς. ὅταν διαγινώσκω τῶν πρὸς τὸν στρατηγὸν ἔντυχέ μοι, παραγγείλας τῷ Σαραπάμμωνι. ἔτους ια Θὼθ ι. διευτύχει. ἔτους ια … … … ἔχεις ὑπεγράφη.

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
τῷho the G3588 Article · dative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DSM — Article · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
ὄχλῳochlos crowd G3793 Noun · dative · singular · masculine
174× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A crowd is a large group of people, like in Matthew 5:1 where Jesus taught the crowd. It can also refer to a riot or a class of people.
Amplified meaning
multitude, large group of people
Tyndale gloss
crowd
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὄχλος (i.e., *ochlos*) refers to a moving crowd or multitude of people, often implying a throng or mob. It can denote the common people in a political sense, contrasting with the elite. The New Testament frequently uses it to describe gatherings of people, as seen in verses like Matthew 5:1 and John 7:49. The entries do not present significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὄχλος, -ου, ὁ,

[in LXX for הָמוֹן (chiefly in Da TH), חַיִל, קָהָל, etc.;]

a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng: Mt 9:23, Mk 2:4, Lk 5:1, Jo 5:13, al.; pl., Mt 5:1, Mk 10:1, Lk 3:7, and freq.; ὄ. ἱκανός, Mk 10:46, al.; τοσοῦτος, Mt 15:33; οὐ μετ’ ὄχλου, Ac 24:18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, Lk 22:6; πᾶς ὁ ὄ., Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὄχλος, -ov, 6, in the N. T. only in the historical bks. and five times in the Rev.; asin Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. down, a crowd, i. e. 1. a casual collection of people; a multitude of men who have flocked together in some place, a throng : Mt. ix. 23, 25; xv. 10, ete. ; Mk. ii. 4; iii. 9, and often; Lk. v. 1,19; vii. 9,ete.; Jn. v. 13; vi. 22, 24; vii. 20, 32,49, etc.; Actsxiv. 14; xvii. 8; xxi. 34; τὶς ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου, Lk. xi. 27; xii. 13; or ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου, xix. 39; ix. 38; ἀπὸ (for 1. 6. on account of [ef. ἀπό, 11. 2b.]) τ. ὄχλου, Lk. xix. 3; ἡ βία τ. ὄχλου, Acts xxi. 35; πολὺς ὄχλος and much oftener ὄχλος πολύς, Mt. xiv. 14; xx. 29; xxvi.47; Mk. v. 21, 24; vi. 34; ix. 14; xiv. 43 [here T Tr WH om. L Tr mrg. br. oh. ]; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; ix.37; Jn. vi. 2,5; xii. 12 [but here Tr mrg. br. WH prefix 6; cf. B. 91 (80)]; Rev. xix. 1,6; with the art. ὁ πολὺς ὄχλ.» the great…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὄχλος. In P Petr II. 4 (6)!® (B.c. 255-4) an official complains that on his way to work he had been hustled, and that, if care is not taken, he will be assaulted—8ivdv γάρ ἐστιν ἐν ὄχλωι ἀτιμάζεσθαι, ‘for it is a dreadful thing to be insulted before a crowd” (Ed.), and in 26. 4.51}. 23 (B.c. 246) ἄλλος ὄχ[λος ἐστεφ]ανωμένος is distinguished from various officials. A striking parallel to Mk 15%® (noted by the editor) is afforded by P Flor I. 618 (A.D. 85) (= Chest. II. p. 89), where the Egyptian Governor addresses a certain Phibion, who had been tried before him, in the words—&g.os μ[ὲ]ν ἧς μαστιγωθῆναι. . . χαρίζομαι δέ σε τοῖς ὄχλοις, ‘you deserved to be scourged, but I hand you over to the multitude.” [Note the use of ὄχλος in the plur., as frequently in Mt (e.g. 42°), with apparently the same meaning as the sing.] A Gnostic charm of iti/iv A.D., P Oxy XII. 1478, contains the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὄχλος (ochlos) — crowd.

ὄχλος, ὁ,

crowd, throng, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄ. τῶν στρατιωτῶν the mass of the soldiers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὄχλῳ in numbers (for an army), [Refs]; οἱ τοιοῦτοι ὄ. undisciplined masses like these,[Refs 2nd c.AD+]; of the camp-followers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. in political sense, populace, mob, opposed to δῆμος (people), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δικαστηρίων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ὄ. and popular assemblies (in a contemptuous sense), [Refs 5th c.BC+] this is already in the mouths of the people, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

3. generally, mass, multitude, ὄ. τὸν πλεῖστον λόγων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵππων ὄ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in plural, the masses, καχεξία τις ὑποδέδυκε τοὺς ὄχλους [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὄχλος

ochlos

from a derivative of 2192 (meaning a vehicle); a throng (as borne

along); by implication, the rabble; by extension, a class of people;

figuratively, a riot:--company, multitude, number (of people), people,

press.

see GREEK for 2192

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὄχλος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a crowd

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὄχλος ochlos 175x

a crowd, a confused multitude of people, Mt. 4:25; 5:1; 7:28; spc. the common people, Jn. 7:49; a multitude, great number, Lk. 5:29; 6:17; Acts 1:15; by impl. tumult, uproar, Lk. 22:6; Acts 24:18

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὄχλος ὄχλος, ὁ, a moving crowd, a throng, mob, Pind., Aesch., etc.; ὁ ὄχλος τῶν στρατιωτῶν the mass of the soldiers, Xen.; τῷ ὄχλῳ in point of numbers, Thuc.; οἱ τοιοῦτοι ὄχλοι undisciplined masses like these, id. Thuc.

in political sense, the populace, mob, Lat. turba, opp. to δῆμος, id. Thuc., Xen.

generally, a mass, multitude, ὄχλος λόγων Aesch.

like Lat. turba, annoyance, trouble, ὄχλον παρέχειν τινί to give one trouble, Hdt.; δι᾽ ὄχλου εἶναι, γενέσθαι to be or become troublesome, Ar., Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSM — Noun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
60%crowd
crowd60% · 105×crowds31% · 55×multitude4% · 7×other renderings3% · 6×other renderings2% · 3×

176 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject55%object21%adverbial14%indirect object10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 174 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, δέbut, on the otheφοβέωI fear, am terri
αὐτός
ἀκολουθέωI accompany, attπρόςμετά
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theσύνειμι (II)I come togetherἀκούωI hear, listen
πολύςmuch, many, often
ὁράωI see, look uponδέbut, on the otheπάλινagain, further,
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςπεδινόςlevelχῆροςa widow
ὄχλοςcrowd174×
what comes after →
πολύςmuch, many, often
καίand, even, also,ὥστεso that, therefoἀπό
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgοὐδέποτεNeg
Article the
ἵστημιI cause to standπροάγωI lead forth, goἱκανόςsufficient, wort
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakσπλαγχνίζομαιI have pity on
ὅτιthat, since, because
ἤδηnow, alreadyὡςas, like as, howἕξIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὄχλος · 174× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke Mark Acts John Revelation

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 17 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.76c. AD 40

διὰ τοῦτο καὶ τὸ λαῶδες καὶ ὄχλον ἔχον ἐν ἡμῖν μέρος,

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.336c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ Ἡσαῦς ἀσπασάμενος αὐτὸν ἀνήρετο τῶν παίδων τὸν ὄχλον καὶ τὰς γυναῖκας, ἠξίου τε τότε μαθὼν περὶ αὐτῶν τὸ πᾶν καὶ αὐτὸς συμβαδίζειν αὐτοῖς πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, Ἰακώβου δὲ προφασιζομένου τὸν κόπον τῶν ὑποζυγίων ὑπεχώρησεν εἰς Σάειραν·

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 25.1.16c. AD 140

ἕτεροι δὲ ἤρχοντο τὰς ῥάβδους χλωρὰς φέροντες ὡς ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου: τὸ δὲ πλεῖον μέρος τοῦ ὄχλου τοιαύτας ῥάβδους ἐπεδίδουν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. BC 3rd c. AD
O.Did. 341DidymoiAD 77–AD 92

ἐάν τι ἀκούσῃς περὶ ἡμῶν τῶν σουκεσσόρων ἀντίγραψόν μοι. ἐκόμισα κι… ον επεν… μὴ ὀχλοῦ … εραν

P.Oxy. 12 1481Oxyrhynchites (?)AD 101–AD 125

ἐλυπήθην ἀκούσας ὅτι ἤκουσας. οὐ γὰρ δεινῶς ἠσθένησα. μέμφομαι δὲ τὸν εἴπαντα σοι. μὴ ὀχλοῦ δὲ πέμπειν τι ἡμῖν. ἐκομισάμεθα δὲ τὰ θαλλία παρὰ τοῦ τοῦ Ἡρακλείδου. Διονυτᾶς δὲ

O.Claud. 4 889Mons ClaudianusAD 150–AD 154

τρεῖς. ἐὰν δὲ πέμπω ἕνα οὐκέτι ἔχω πέμψαι εἰς τὴν λατομίαν. οἶδας δὲ ὅτι ὄχλον πολὺν δαπανᾶ εἰς τὴν κατάστασιν. ἐγὼ δ …τα τὰ παρʼ ἐμε … … ηκα

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
ἀναπεσεῖνanapiptō to recline G377 Verb · second aorist · active · infinitive
12× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To recline means to lean back or lie down, like at a meal in Luke 11:37 or on the ground in Matthew 15:35. Jesus reclined at the Last Supper in John 13:12.
Amplified meaning
recline, lean back
Tyndale gloss
to recline
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἀναπίπτω is built from the prefix ἀνα- and the verb πίπτω, meaning to fall back or recline. It covers a range of meanings from physically lying down to reclining at meals, as seen in several New Testament verses like Luke 11:37 and John 13:25. There is a noted distinction between ἀναπίπτω and similar terms, particularly in how they indicate a change of position.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀνα-πίπτω,

[in LXX: Ge 49:9 (כּרע) To 2:1 7:8, Jth 12:10, Si 25:18 35 (32):2, Da TH Sus 37*;]

(cl.) to fall back.

In late writers = ἀνα-κλίνομαι, to recline for a repast (MM, VGT, s.v.): at table, Lk 11:37 14:10 17:7 22:14, Jo 13:12 21:20; on the ground, Mt 15:35, Mk 6:40 8:6, Jo 6:10; to lean back, Jo 13:25 (T, ἐπιπεσών; v.s. ἀνάκειμαι, ad fin.).†

SYN.: ἀνάκειμαι (q.v.), ἀνακλίνομαι.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀνα-πίπτω: 2 aor. ἀνέπεσον, 3 pers. plur. ἀνέπεσον Mk. vi. 40 (Τ Tr WH ἀνέπεσαν) : Jn. vi. 10 (LT Tr WH averecav), inf. ἀναπεσεῖν, impv. ἀνάπεσε Lk. xiv. 10 (Ree. ἀνάπεσον fr. 1 aor. ἀνέπεσα, [(Grsb. ἀνάπεσαι i. e. 1 aor. mid. impv.)]); Lk. xvii. 7 [RG ἀνάπεσαι, cf. WH. App. Ρ. 164; Ταῦ, Proleg. p. 123; see πίπτω]. ptep. ἀναπεσών ; cf. W. § 13, 1 p. 73 (71); [B. 39 (34) sq., 67 (59); fr. Eur. down]; to lie back, lie down: absol., Mk. vi. 40; Jn. vi. 10, (se. on the ground) ; ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, Mt. xv. 35; ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς. Mk. viii. 6. In later Grk. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p- 216; [W. 23 (22)]) for ἀνακλίνομαι to recline at table: Lk. xi. 37; xiv. 10; xvii. 7; xxii. 14; Jn. xiii. 12; xxi. 20 [al. refer this to the following signif.]. to lean back, Jn. xiii. 25 L Tr WH. [It denotes an act rather than a state, and in the last pass. differs from ἀνάκειμαι, vs. 23, by indicating a change of position.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀναπίπτω. For the later meaning ‘‘ lie down, recline,” of which there is no instance in Attic Greek (Rutherford VP p. 294), see P Par 514 (B.c. 160) (= Selections p. 19), ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾽ ἄχυρον . . . ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός. (On the irregular voice, see Proveg. p. 159). Cf. LXX Gen 495 ἀναπεσὼν ἐκοιμήθης ὡς λέων : see Anz Swbsidia, p. 301 f. 3) ςς

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀναπίπτω (anapiptō) — to recline.

ἀναπίπτω,

poetry ἀμπ-, fall back, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; lay oneself back, like rowers, [Refs 5th c.BC+], compare e; of riders, ὑπτίους ἀναπεπτωκότας ἐλαύνειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. metaphorically, fall back, give ground, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; flag, lose heart, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ταῖς σπουδαῖς (vulgar form σπονδ-) ἀναπεπτωκέναι[Refs 1st c.BC+]

2. b perfect participle ἀναπεπτωκώς lifeless, of style, σχῆμα ἀ.[Refs 2nd c.AD+]

3. of a plan, to be given up, ἀνεπεπτώκει τὰ τῆς ἐξόδου[Refs 4th c.BC+]

4. ἀ. ἀπ᾽ οἴκων to be banished from one's house, poetical cited in Athenagoraspro Christo 22.

5. recline at meals, like{ἀνάκειμαι}, [NT+2nd c.AD+]

5. b take to one's bed in sickness, [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀναπίπτω

anapipto

from 303 and 4098; to fall back, i.e. lie down, lean back:--lean, sit

down (to meat).

see GREEK for 303

see GREEK for 4098

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀναπίπτω

v.

I lie down, recline, fall back upon

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀναπίπτω anapiptō 12x

to fall or recline backwards; to recline at table, etc., Lk. 11:37; to throw one’s self back, Jn. 21:20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀναπίπτω to fall back, Aesch.

to fall back, give ground, Thuc.: to flag, lose heart, Lat. concidere animo, Dem.

of a plan, to be given up, id. Dem.

to recline at table, like ἀνάκειμαι, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAN — Verb · second aorist · active · infinitive
second aorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5629

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%he reclined
he reclined25% · 3×recline17% · 2×sit down8% · 1×they sat down8% · 1×do recline8% · 1×do recline?8% · 1×reclined8% · 1×having leaned8% · 1×other renderings8% · 1×

12 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 12 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςὅς
ὄχλοςa crowd
Article the
δέbut, on the other ha
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in
πορεύομαιI travel, journey, g
καλέωI call, invite,
παρέρχομαιI pass by
εὐθέωςimmediately, soo
ἀναπίπτωto recline12×
what comes after →
ἐπί
Article the
πρασιάa company formed int
πρασιάa company formed
εἰς
Article the
καίand, even, also, nam
Article the
εἰμίI am, exist
δέbut, on the othe

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀναπίπτω · 12× in the New Testament
John Luke Mark Matthew
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaOn Drunkenness 167c. AD 40

πολὺ γὰρ σκότος τῶν ὄντων καὶ σωμάτων καὶ πραγμάτων κατακεχυμένον οὐκ ἐᾷ τὴν ἑκάστου φύσιν ἰδεῖν, ἀλλὰ κἂν βιασάμενός τις ὑπὸ περιεργίας ἢ τοῦ φιλομαθοῦς ἐθελήσῃ διακῦψαι, καθάπερ οἱ πεπηρωμένοι προσπταίων τοῖς ἐν ποσί, πρίν τι λαβεῖν, ἀναπεσὼν…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 8.282c. AD 75–95

μέσου δʼ αὐτοῦ περιληφθέντος τῶν πολεμίων ἡ μὲν στρατιὰ κατέδεισε καὶ ταῖς ψυχαῖς ἀνέπεσεν, ὁ δʼ Ἀβίας παρεθάρρυνε καὶ τὰς ἐλπίδας ἔχειν ἐν τῷ θεῷ παρεκάλει·

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
ἐπὶepi on G1909 Preposition
886× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A preposition meaning upon, to, or against, often used to show location or direction, like in Matthew 6:10 where Jesus teaches us to pray for God's will to be done on earth. It can also indicate a sense of time or order.
Tyndale gloss
upon/to/against
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπί (epi) is a preposition that indicates a relationship of superposition, often translated as 'on,' 'upon,' or 'over.' It can govern the genitive, dative, or accusative cases, covering meanings related to place, time, authority, and various figurative uses. In the New Testament, it frequently appears with the accusative case, especially in contexts of motion or direction, such as in Matthew 14:28.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ’, before a rough breathing ἐφ’),

prep. c. gen., dat., acc. (acc. most freq. in NT),

with primary sense of superposition, on, upon.

C. gen.,

of place, answering the question, where?

of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mt 6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, I Co 11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mt 24:30, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mk 4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, He 6:7, al.; fig., ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (MM, s.v. ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Ga 3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abiding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 34…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπὶ ξένης εἶναι, and P Giss I. 2115 μένε ἐπὶ ἑαυτοῦ, “stay at home.” The sense of ‘‘near,’’ “‘in the vicinity of”’ appears in P Ryl II. 127° (A.D. 29) κοιμωμένον μον ἐπὶ τῆς θύρας: cf. Ac 5°% and see Jn 6᾽", 211 ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, where the rendering ‘“‘ near the sea,’ or, as we should say, “fon the shore,” is to be preferred (cf. Abbott /ok. Gr. p- 261). In P Lond 11688 (a.p. 18) (= III. p. 136) ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ A(Bos μέρεσι ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις, ἐπί is almost = ἐν." The local force still underlies the meaning of such a phrase as ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας (cf. Mk 1214) in the census paper P Oxy II. 255}5 (A.D. 48) (= Selections, p. 47), where it is stated that the return is ‘“‘sound”’ and rests “on a true basis "᾿-ἐ]ξ [ὑ]γιοῦς kal ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας. Cf. also P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθὼς ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς τ[ο]ῦ [εἰς τὸ] τε ἔτος σπόρου μεμισθῶσϑαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπί (epi) — upon/to/against.

ἐπί,

Thess. (before τ) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.

__A WITH GEN.:

__A.I of Place,

__A.I.1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ᾽ ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (i.e. σταθέντα) [Refs]; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ᾽ ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ᾽ ἵππων on our chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk on tiptoe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, [Refs]; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but most frequently, in, rarely in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the country. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἰκήματος κατίσαι…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπί

epi

a primary preposition; properly, meaning superimposition (of time,

place, order, etc.), as a relation of distribution (with the genitive

case), i.e. over, upon, etc.; of rest (with the dative case) at, on,

etc.; of direction (with the accusative case) towards, upon,

etc.:--about (the times), above, after, against, among, as long as

(touching), at, beside, X have charge of, (be-, (where-))fore, in (a

place, as much as, the time of, -to), (because) of, (up-)on (behalf

of), over, (by, for) the space of, through(-out), (un-)to(-ward),

with. In compounds it retains essentially the same import, at, upon,

etc. (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπί

Prep.

on, to, against, on the basis of, at

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπί epi 890x

(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπί

on, upon with gen., dat., and acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radic. signf. upon.

WITH GEN.:

of Place,

with Verbs of Rest, upon or on, κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ χθονός Il.; ἐφ᾽ ἵππου on horse-back, etc.; ἐπὶ γῆς upon earth, Soph.; ἐπ᾽ ἀγροῦ in the country, Od.; also at or near, ἐπὶ Λήμνου off Lemnos, Hdt., etc.:—with Verbs of motion, the sense is pregnant, ἐπ᾽ ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, Il., etc.; ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων Xen.

not strictly of Place, μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς to remain in the command, id. Xen.; ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων engaged in business, Dem.: —of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾽ ἀγκύρας to ride at (i. e. in dependence on an) anchor, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

On

Light; the sun, (Gen. 41:45, 50), the great seat of sun-worship, called also Bethshemesh (Jer. 43:13) and Aven (Ezek. 30:17), stood on the east bank of the Nile, a few miles north of Memphis, and near Cairo, in the north-east. The Vulgate and the LXX. Versions have “Heliopolis” (“city of the sun”) instead of On in Genesis and of Aven in Ezekiel. The “city of destruction” Isaiah speaks of (19:18, marg. “of Heres;” Heb. ‘Ir-ha-heres, which some MSS. read Ir-ha-heres, i.e., “city of the sun”) may be the name given to On, the prophecy being that the time will come when that city which was known as the “city of the sun-god” shall become the “city of destruction” of the sun-god, i.e., when idolatry shall cease, and the worship…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(abode or city of the sun), a town of lower Egypt, called BETH-SHEMESH in (Jeremiah 43:13) On is better known under its Greek name Heliopolis. It was situated on the east side of the Pelusiac branch of the Nile, just below the point of the Delta, and about twenty miles northeast of Memphis. The chief object of worship at Heliopolis was the sun, whose temple, described by Strabo, is now only represented by the single beautiful obelisk, of red granite so feet 2 inches high above the pedestal which has stood for more than 4000 years, having been erected by Usirtesen, the second king of the twelfth dynasty. Heliopolis was anciently famous for its learning, and Eudoxus and Plato studied under its priests. The first mention of this place in the Bible is in the history of Joseph, to whom we read Pharaoh gave "to wife Asenath the daughter…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

See HELIOPOLIS.

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

pain; force; iniquity

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%upon
upon28% · 258×on22% · 203×to8% · 77×in7% · 62×over7% · 59×at6% · 57×against4% · 38×for4% · 37×other renderings13% · 116×

907 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 46 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 886 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaαὐτόςλευκόςwhite, bright
αὐτός
δέbut, on the otheφιάληa shallow and flκεφαλήthe head
κάθημαιI sit, am seated
Article theκαίand, even, also,γυνήa woman, wife, m
πίπτωI fall, fall under
δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,Article the
ἔρχομαιI come, go
ὁδόςa way, road, jouγάρforκαίand, even, also,
ἐπίon886×
what comes after →
Article the
γῆthe earth, soil,κεφαλήthe headθρόνοςa throne, seat
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theὅτιthat, since, bec
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article theὅςκαίand, even, also,
σύ
καίand, even, also,Article theπᾶςall, the whole,
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theὅς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπί · 886× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Revelation Matthew Mark John Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
τῆςho the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
γῆς, ground, G1093 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
250× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for earth or ground, referring to soil, a region, or the entire globe, as seen in Luke 21:35 and Acts 1:8.
Amplified meaning
earth, soil
Tyndale gloss
earth: soil
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word γῆ () means 'earth' or 'land' and is used in various contexts, including the physical ground, cultivated land, and regions or countries. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often contrasting with 'heaven' or 'sea.' The lexicons indicate a consensus on its meanings, which encompass both the solid part of the globe and the concept of territory.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

γῆ, γῆς, ἡ,

[in LXX for אֶרֶץ, אֲדָמָה, etc.;]

the earth, world: Lk 21:35, Ac 1:8, He 11:13, Re 3:10, al.; opp. to οὐρανός, Mt 5:18 11:25, Mk 13:27, al.

land;

opp. to sea or water: Mk 4:1, Lk 5:3, Jo 6:21, al.;

as subject to cultivation: Mt 13:5, Mk 4:8, Lk 13:7,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

γῆ; gen. γῆς, 7, (contr. fr. yéa, poet. γαῖα), Sept. very often for γι and ΤΣ, earth; 1. arable land: Mt. xiii. 5, 8, 23; Mk. iv. 8, 20, 26, 28, 31; Lk. xiii. 7; xiv. 35 (34); Jn. xii. 24; Heb. vi. 7; Jas. v. 7; Rev. ix. 4; of the earthy material out of which a thing is formed, with the implied idea of frailty and weakness: ἐκ γῆς χοϊκός, 1 Co. xv. 47. 2. the ground, the earth as a standing-place, (Germ. Boden) : Mt. x. 29; xv. 35; xxiii. 85; xxvii. 51; Mk. viii. 6; ix. 20; xiv. 35; Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; xxiv. 5; Jn. viii. 6, 8, [i.e Rec.]; Acts ix. 4, 8. 3. the main /and, opp. to sea or water: Mk. iv. 1; vi. 47; Lk. ν. 8; viii. 27; Jn. vi. 21; xxi. 8 sq. 11; Rev. xii. 12. 4. the earth as a whole, the world (Lat. terrarum orbis); a. the earth as opp. to the heavens: Mt. v. 18, 35; vi.10; xvi.19; xviii. 18; xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. ii. 14; Jn. xii. 32; Acts ii. 19…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

γῆ. The rare plural forms of this word which are found in the LXX may be illustrated from the Ptolemaic papyri of 1i/B.c., e.g. BGU III. 993329 (νος 128-7) γῶν τε καὶ οἰκιῶν, P Tor I. 12° (B.c. 116) ἕνεκεν τοῦ kal τῶν γῶν μὴ μετεσχηκέναι αὐτήν, P Tebt I. 6% (B.c. 140-39) yas τε καὶ ἕτερα : see Thackeray G7. i. p. 143. In MGr, beside ἢ γῆ, we have the indeclinable ἢ γῆς, τῆς γῆς, etc. : see Thumb Handbook, p. 57. The familiar Biblical ἔπὶ γῆς appears in P Ryl 11. $78 (early iii/A.b.) 6 αὐτὸς ὁριοδείκτης ἐπέδειξα ἐπὶ γῆς (restored from 1.*), “1 the said surveyor have verified it on the spot”: the editors suggest that ἐπὶ γῆς should be read in P Thead 54% and 55%. It may be observed that γῆ in papyri is regularly ‘‘land” in small or moderate quantities, a sense never found in NT, where γῆ is always antithetic to sky or sea, or denotes a district or country, The LXX and papyri, in their use…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

γῆ (gē) — earth: planet.

γῆ, ἡ,

occasionally in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: dual γαῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; γῶν [Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—earth (including land and sea, [Refs 7th c.BC+] opposed to heaven, or land opposed to sea, Γῆ τε καὶ Ἠέλιος καὶ Ἐρινύες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τίς γ; [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κατὰ γῆν on land, by land, opposed to ναυσί, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to ἐκ θαλάσσης, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ γῆς on earth, opposed to νέρθε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ γῆς below the earth, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: genitive with local Adverbs, ἵνα γῆς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ποῦ, ποῖ, ὅποι γ., [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. earth, as an element, [Refs 6th c.BC+]

2. b γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ αἰτεῖν, as tokens of submission, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

γῆ

ge

contracted from a primary word; soil; by extension a region, or the

solid part or the whole of the terrene globe (including the occupants

in each application):--country, earth(-ly), ground, land, world.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

γῆ, γῆς, ἡ

n.f.

the earth, soil, land

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

γῆ gē 250x

earth, soil, Mt. 13:5; Mk. 4:8, et al.; the ground, surface of the earth, Mt. 10:29; Lk. 6:49, et al.; the land, as opposed to the sea or a lake, Lk. 5:11; Jn. 21:8, 9, 11; the earth, world, Mt. 5:18, 35, et al.; by synec. the inhabitants of the earth, Mt. 5:13; 6:10; 10:34; a land, region, tract, country, territory, Mt. 2:20; 14:34;by way of eminence, the chosen land, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

γῆ earth opp. to heaven, or land opp. to sea, Hom., etc.; κατὰ γῆν on land, by land, Thuc.; κατὰ γῆς Xen.:— ἐπὶ γῆς on earth, Soph.; κατὰ γῆς below the earth, Trag.:—the gen. with local adverbs, ἵνα γῆς, ποῦ γῆς, ubi terrarum, where in (in what quarter of) the world, where on earth, Soph., etc.

earth, as an element, opp. to air, water, fire, Plat.

a land, country, Aesch., etc.; γῆν πρὸ γῆς from land to land, id. Aesch.

the earth or ground as tilled, Soph., Plat.

a lump of earth, in the phrase γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ αἰτεῖν, γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ διδόναι, in token of submission, Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ Man made from Ge 2:7; 3:19,23; Job 4:19; 33:6

→ Animals made from Ge 2:19

→ Vegetables come from Ge 2:9

→ Cursed Ge 3:17; 5:29

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%earth
earth67% · 170×land19% · 48×ground7% · 18×soil4% · 11×other renderings3% · 8×

255 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial59%subject18%object15%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 250 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐπίεἰςκαίand, even, also,
καίand, even, also, nam
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaΖαβουλώνPropἔκπαλαιfrom of old, lon
ἐπί
καίand, even, also,εἴτεand if, whetherεἰμίI am, exist
ἐκ
ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oἐγώἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
ἐν
πάροικοςa stranger, foreσημεῖονa sign, miracle,παροικίαa sojourning
γῆground,250×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἐπίγίνομαιI come into bein
Article the
καλόςbeautiful, good,ἀγαθόςgoodἔργονwork, labor, act
εἰμίI am, exist
δέωI bindλύωI loose, untie, καίand, even, also,
ὅτιthat, since, because
ὑποπόδιονa footstoolκρύπτωI hide, conceal,ἀποκρύπτωI hide away, con
ἐκ
Article theὕδωρwater

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceγῆ · 250× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew Acts Luke Mark John Hebrews James 2 Peter Colossians Ephesians 1 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,727 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 26c. AD 40

Φησὶ δ’ ὡς „ἐν ἀρχῇ ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν", τὴν ἀρχὴν παραλαμβάνων | οὐχ ὡς οἴονταί τινες τὴν κατὰ χρόνον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.7c. AD 100

λέγει δὲ πάλιν πρὸς αὐτούς: Μὴ ἐγὼ ἐνετειλάμην τοῖς πατράσιν ὑμῶν ἐκπορευομένοις ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, προσενέγκαι μοι ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ θυσίας;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀδύνατος ὄμμασι τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι περὶ Πάθυριν γῆν ἤπειρον σιτοφόρον ἀρουρῶν … ἧς γείτονες νότουπλατεῖαὁδός, βορρᾶ … περίχωμα … προπεπρα

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

ξ μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἀδιαιρέτου ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ βορρᾶ πεδίωι Παθύρεως τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος ἕβδομον·

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίAnd8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
λαβὼνlambanō having taken G2983 Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
258× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To take or receive something, like in Matthew 26:26, where Jesus takes bread and breaks it. It can also mean to accept or obtain something, and is often translated as receive or accept in the KJV.
Amplified meaning
received, accepted
Tyndale gloss
to take
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λαμβάνω (lambanō) means both 'to take' and 'to receive,' covering a wide range of applications from literal actions like grasping or seizing to more abstract uses such as accepting ideas or concepts. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts involving physical actions (e.g., taking bread in Mt 26:26) or receiving something (e.g., receiving a message in Jn 6:21). The lexicons note that the word can also imply a sense of violence or urgency in some contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λαμβάνω,

[in LXX chiefly for לקח, also for נשׂא, לכד, אחז, etc.;]

to take, lay hold of: absol., Mt 26:26, Mk 14:22; c. acc. rei, Mt 5:40 26:52, al. mult.; c. acc. pers., Mt 21:35, Mk 12:3, al.; pleonastic λαβών (M, Pr., 230; Bl., §74, 2), Mt 13:31 14:19, al.; so also indic., Mk 7:27, Jo 19:1, 40, Re 8:5, al.; metaph., c. acc. rei, ἀφορμήν, Ro 7:8, 11; ὑδόδειγμα, Ja 5:10; id. c. acc. pers.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λαμβάνω; impf. ἐλάμβανον; fut. λήψομαι, (LT Tr WH λήμψομαι, an Alexandrian form; 568 8. v. M, μ); 2 aor. ἔλαβον (2 pers. plur. once [in Tdf. 7 after B*] ἐλάβατε, 1 Jn. ii. 27; see reff. s. v. ἀπέρχομαι, init.), impv. λάβε (Rey. x. 8 54.), not λαβέ (W. § 6,1 a.; B. 62 (54)); pf. εἴληφα, 2 pers. εἴληφας [and εἴληφες (Rev. xi. 17 WHI; see xomidw); on the use of the pf. interchangeably with an aor. (Rey. v. 7; viii. 5, ete.) οἵ. B. 197 (170) ; W. 272 (255); Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. §§ 67, 68], ptep. εἰληφώς ; [Pass., pres. ptep. λαμβανόμενος ; pf. 3 pers. sing. εἴληπται, Jn. viii. 4 ὙΠ το. (rejected section)]; Sept. hundreds of times for n>), very often for 8wW3, also for 729 and several times for 108; [fr. Hom. down]; I. to take,i.e. 1. to take with the hand, lay hold of, any pers. or thing in order to use it: absol., where the context shows what is taken, Mt.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λαμβάνω in its ordinary sense of ‘‘ receive,” ‘‘ get,” as in Mt 78, Jn 357, is naturally very common, e.g. P Giss I. 67° (ii/a.p.) ἔλαβόν σου ἐπιστολήν, P Ryl II. 122} (a.p. 127) λαβὼν τὸ πιττάκιον τὸ ἀκόλουθον ποίει, “on receipt of this document, act in accordance with it” (Edd.), P Fay 1274 (ii/iii a.p.) | ἐὰ (= ἐὰν) λάβητε φαγὸν πέμψαι ἐμοὶ διὰ Karolrov, “if you get any lentils send them to me by Katoitus " (Edd.), and 76, 1355 (iv/A.D.) τὰ ἀργύρια ἃ ἔλαβες, “money which you received.” Similarly in connexion with money receipts, as 26. 1098 (early i/A.D.) ἀποχὴν θέλω λαβεῖν, “1 wish to get a receipt,” 20. 2113 (A.D. 134) ἀλλήλ[οις] ἀποχὰς τούς τε διδόντας καὶ τοὺς λαμβάν[ο]ντας, ‘‘that payer and payee shall mutually give receipts’’ (Edd.). Wilcken Ostr. i. p. 109 has pointed out that in the case of all ostraca receipts known to him the writers were Romans, but see 7hed Ostr 1058…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λαμβάνω (lambanō) — to take.

λαμβάνω,

future λήψομαι (λήψω only late, variant in [LXX]; Ionic dialect λάψομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Doric dialectfuture 2nd pers. singular λαψῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+], infinitive λαμψεῖσθαι [Refs 2nd c.BC+]aorist 2 ἔλᾰβον, Epic dialect ἔλλᾰβον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect Iterat. λάβεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; written λάβε in middle Ms. of [Refs 4th c.BC+] Attic dialectaccusative to [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: perfect εἴληφα [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect, Doric dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive λελαβήκειν [Refs]: pluperfect εἰλήφειν [Refs 5th c.BC+] (κατα-); Doric dialect perfect subjunctive 3rd.pers. singular (παρ-) λελόνβῃ [Refs] —middle, aorist 2 ἐλαβόμην, Epic dialect ἐλλ-, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect reduplicate λελαβέσθαι [Refs]:—passive, future ληφθήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐλήφθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ἐλάφθην [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λαμβάνω

lambano

a prolonged form of a primary verb, which is use only as an alternate

in certain tenses; to take (in very many applications, literally and

figuratively (properly objective or active, to get hold of; whereas

1209 is rather subjective or passive, to have offered to one; while

138 is more violent, to seize or remove)):--accept, + be amazed,

assay, attain, bring, X when I call, catch, come on (X unto), +

forget, have, hold, obtain, receive (X after), take (away, up).

see GREEK for 1209

see GREEK for 138

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λαμβάνω

v.

I receive, take

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λαμβάνω lambanō 258x

to take, take up, take in the hand, Mt. 10:38; 13:31, 33; to take on one’s self, sustain, Mt. 8:17; to take, seize, seize upon, Mt. 5:40; 21:34; Lk. 5:26; 1 Cor. 10:13; to catch, Lk. 5:5; 2 Cor. 12:16; to assume, put on, Phil. 2:7; to make a rightful or successful assumption of, Jn. 3:27; to conceive, Acts 28:15; to take by…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

λαμβάνω from Root ΛΑΒ The orig. sense of the word is two-fold, one (more active) to take, and the other (more passive) to receive

to take:

to take hold of, grasp, seize, Hom., etc.; the part seized in gen., the whole in acc., τὴν πτέρυγος λάβεν caught her by the wing, Il.; γούνων λάβε κούρην Od., etc.:—then, with gen. of part only, ποδῶν, γούνων, κόρυθος λάβεν took hold of the feet, etc., Il.

to take by violence, seize, carry off as prize or booty, Hom.

λ. δίκην, ποινάς, Lat. sumere poenas, to exact punishment, Eur., etc.; v. infr. II. 3.

of passions, feelings, etc., to seize, Hom., etc.; of fever and sudden illnesses, to attack, Hdt., attic

of a deity, to seize, possess, τινά Hdt.: of darkness, and the like, to occupy, possess, Aesch.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAP-NSM — Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
18%having taken
having taken18% · 48×receive8% · 20×having received7% · 18×took6% · 16×take4% · 11×receiving4% · 10×receives4% · 10×do take3% · 9×other renderings46% · 123×

265 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 76 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb98%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 258 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςλαμβάνωI receive, takeλέγωI say, speak
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ὅςἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
δέbut, on the otheεἰςἐσθίωI eat
ὅς
σίναπιmustardζύμηleaven, fermentδιακονίαwaiting at table
Article the
γάρforσύθεόςGod, a god
λαμβάνωhaving taken258×
what comes after →
Article the
ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fβιβλίονa papyrus rollχάραγμαsculpture, a sta
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἀναγγέλλωI announce, makeζωήlife
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,εἰςσύ
πνεῦμαwind, breath, spirit
ἅγιοςset apart, holy,δουλείαslavery, bondageυἱοθεσίαadoption
γυνήa woman, wife, my la
ἐγκρύπτωI hide in, mix wκαίand, even, also,κρύπτωI hide, conceal,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλαμβάνω · 258× in the New Testament
Matthew John Acts Revelation Luke Mark Hebrews 1 Corinthians Romans 2 Corinthians James 1 John

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament21 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 650 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 54c. AD 40

εἶθ’, οἷα φιλεῖ, προσπεριειργάζετο, τίς ἡ τῶν ὁρατῶν δὴ τούτων οὐσία καὶ εἰ ἀγένητοι πεφύκασιν ἢ γενέσεως ἔλαβον ἀρχὴν καὶ τίς ὁ τρόπος τῆς κινήσεως καὶ τίνες αἱ αἰτίαι δι’ ὧν ἕκαστα οἰκονομεῖται·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Gen. 1 20Pathyris110 BC

Λατοπολίτου, ἣν ἐωνήσατο ἐκ βασιλικοῦ ἐν τῶι ε ἔτει πρὸς τὰ ταύτης ἐκφόρια, καὶ λαβὼν τὴν εἰθισμένην διαγραφὴν ἐπικεχωρηκέναι ταύτηι τὴν ἑαυτοῦ δ μερίδα, ὃς καὶ παρὼν ἐπὶ τοῦ

P.Bad. 2 3Pathyris110 BC

Λατοπολίτου, ἣν ἐωνήσατο ἐκ βασιλικοῦ ἐν τῷ πέμπτωι ἔτει πρὸς τὰ τῆς γῆς ἐκφόρια λαβὼν τὴν εἰθισμένην διαγραφήν. ὁ Ἁρκοννῆσις ἐπικεχώρηκεν ταύτῃ τὴν τετάρτην μερίδα πρὸς πυροῦ ἀρτάβας δέκα

P.Grenf. 2 37Pathyris109 BC

τῆς κώμης καθέσταται Πατσεοῦς Πατῆτος ὁ τὴν ἐντολὴν ἐπιδεικνὺς χειρογραφήσας ὡς εἴθισται καὶ διαστολὴν λαβὼν προ

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
τοὺςho the G3588 Article · accusative · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-APM — Article · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-APM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
ἑπτὰhepta seven G2033 Adjective · nominative
88× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for the number seven, used in the Bible to describe completeness or perfection, as seen in Matthew 12:45 and Mark 8:5.
Amplified meaning
complete, perfect number
Tyndale gloss
seven
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἑπτά (i.e., *hepta*) means 'seven' and is an indeclinable numeral. It appears in various New Testament passages, including Matthew and Acts. The entries note its use as a mystical number and in references to specific groups or concepts, but there is no significant disagreement among the lexicons.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπτά, οἱ, αἱ, τά

indecl.,

seven: Mt 12:45 18:22 (cf. ἑβδομηκοντάκις), Mk 8:5, al.; οἱ ἐ, Ac 21:8

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἑπτά. As we have no fresh light from our sources, it lies outside our sphere to discuss the uses of this number in the NT, but reference may be made to the notes by Allen on Mk 16%, and by Moffatt (in ΞΟ 7) on Rev 51. Note also Ac 1219 Ὁ κατέβησαν τοὺς { βαθμούς and Ey. Petr. 8 ἐπέχρισαν ἑπτὰ σφραγῖδας. MGr ἑφτά shows the aspirate in compensation for the loss (in pronunciation) of the rough breathing.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἑπτά (hepta) — seven.

ἑπτά, οἱ, αἱ, τά,

indeclinable seven, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; as a mystical number, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; αἱ ἑ. νῆσοι the seven largest islands, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τὰ ἑ. θεάματα the [Refs 1st c.BC+]; οἱ ἑ. σοφισταί the [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ ἑ. alone, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

2. οἱ ἑ., board of magistrates at Olbia, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; οἱ ἑ. ἄνδρες, = Latin septemviri epulones, [Refs 5th c.BC+] sept[macutenull], cf. Sanskrit saptá, Latin septem (fancifully connected with σέβομαι, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἑπτά

hepta

a primary number; seven:--seven.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἑπτά, οἱ, αἱ, τά

Indec.num.

seven

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἑπτά hepta 88x

seven, indecl. numeral, Mt. 15:34, 37; by Jewish usage for a round number, Mt. 12:45; Lk. 11:26

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἑπτά seven, Lat. septem, Hom., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NUI — Adjective · nominative
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NUI Indeclinable NUmeral (Adjective)

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sev'-'-n (shebha`; hepta).

See NUMBER.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Seven

This number occurs frequently in Scripture, and in such connections as lead to the supposition that it has some typical meaning. On the seventh day God rested, and hallowed it (Gen. 2:2, 3). The division of time into weeks of seven days each accounts for many instances of the occurrence of this number. This number has been called the symbol of perfection, and also the symbol of rest. “Jacob’s seven years’ service to Laban; Pharaoh’s seven fat oxen and seven lean ones; the seven branches of the golden candlestick; the seven trumpets and the seven priests who sounded them; the seven days’ siege of Jericho; the seven churches, seven spirits, seven stars, seven seals, seven vials, and many others, sufficiently prove the importance of this sacred number” (see Lev. 25:4;

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The frequent recurrence of certain numbers in the sacred literature of the Hebrews is obvious to the most superficial reader, but seven so far surpasses the rest, both in the frequency with which it recurs and in the importance of the objects with which it is associated, that it may fairly be termed the representative symbolic number. The influence of the number seven was not restricted to the Hebrews; it prevailed among the Persians, ancient Indians, Greeks and Romans. The peculiarity of the Hebrew view consists in the special dignity of the seventh, and not simply in that of seen. The Sabbath being the seventh day suggested the adoption of seven as the coefficient, so to say, for their appointment of all sacred periods; and we thus find the 7th month ushered in by the Feast of Trumpets, and signalized by the celebration of the Feast of Tabernacles and the Great Day of Atonement; 7…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

As from the beginning this was the number of days in the week, so it often has in Scripture a sort of emphasis attached to it, and is very generally used as a round or perfect number. Clean beasts were taken into the ark by sevens, Ge 7:1-24. The years of plenty and famine in Egypt were marked by sevens, Ge 41:1-57. With the Jews, not only was there a seventh day Sabbath, but every seventh year was a Sabbath, and after every seven times seven years came a jubilee. Their great feasts of unleavened bread and of tabernacles were observed for seven days; the number of animals in many of their sacrifices was limited to seven. The golden candlestick had seven branches. Seven priests with seven trumpets went around the walls of Jericho seven days, and seven times on the seventh day. In…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
98%seven
seven98% · 86×other renderings2% · 2×

88 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object41%subject31%adverbial11%predicate10%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 88 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ἔχωI have, hold, poἐκ
κεφαλήthe head
ἔχωI have, hold, poκαίand, even, also,ἑπτάIndec
λέγωI say, speak
δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,
ἡμέραa day
διατρίβωI tarry, continuαὐτοῦhere, thereἐπιμένωI remain, tarry,
ἑαυτοῦ
μετάπονηρόςevil, bad, wicke
ἑπτάseven88×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
κέραςa hornὀλίγος& AdvεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in
ἄγγελοςan angel, messenger
Article theὅςἑπτάIndec
ἐκκλησίαan assembly, congreg
εἰμίI am, existArticle theεἰς
πνεῦμαwind, breath, spirit
Article theὅς
ἀστήρa star
ὅςἄγγελοςan angel, messenἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἑπτά · 88× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew Mark Acts Luke Hebrews
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 189 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 91c. AD 40

διχῶς ἑβδομὰς λέγεται, ἡ μὲν ἐντὸς δεκάδος, ἥτις ἑπτάκις μονάδι μόνῃ μετρεῖται συνεστῶσα ἐκ μονάδων ἑπτά, ἡ δ’ ἐκτὸς δεκάδος, ἀριθμὸς οὗ πάντως ἀρχὴ μονὰς κατὰ τοὺς διπλασίους ἢ τριπλασίους ἢ συνόλως ἀναλογοῦντας ἀριθμούς, ὡς ἔχει ὁ ἑξηκοντατέσσαρα…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.63c. AD 75–95

Ἀνώχου δὲ Ἰαράδης υἱὸς ἦν, ἐκ δὲ τούτου Μαρουῆλος, οὗ γίνεται παῖς Μαθουσάλας, τοῦ δὲ Λάμεχος, ᾧ παῖδες ὑπῆρξαν ἑπτὰ καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα ἐκ δύο γυναικῶν αὐτῷ φύντες Σελλᾶς καὶ Ἄδας.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 3.8.2c. AD 140

ἐμβλέψασά μοι ὑπεμειδίασεν καὶ λέγει μοι: Βλέπεις ἑπτὰ γυναῖκας κύκλῳ τοῦ πύργου;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Athen.. 23Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 82

ζ, ἐν Θεαδελφίαι τῆς Θεμίστου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοΐτου νομοῦ. ὁμολογοῦσιν Δῖος ὡς ἐτῶν εἴκοσι ἑπτὰ οὐλὴ δακτύλῳ πρώτῳ χειρὸς ἀριστερᾶς καὶ Ὦσις ὡς ἐτῶν εἴκοσι τεσσάρων οὐλὴ ποδὶ ἀριστερῶι

P.Alex. 7Dionysias (Arsinoites)AD 113

τέσσαρας καὶ τοὺς τόκους ἀποδότωσαν οἱ δεδανεισμένοι τῷ Διοσκόρῳ ἐν μηνὶ Τῦβι τοῦ εἰσίοντος ἕπτα καὶ δεκάτου ἔτους Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Νέρουα Τραιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Δακικοῦ μηδὲν ἐλαττουμένου τοῦ Διοσκόρου

P.Amh. 2 121ArsinoitesAD 160

Ἁθὺρ η. διέγραψε Σαβεῖνος Ζωσίμου ὑπὲρ ζυτηρᾶς κατʼ ἄνδρα τοῦ διεληλυθότος κγ ἔτους δραχμὰς ἑπτὰ τετρώβολον, γίνονται δραχμαὶ ζ τετρώβολον. κδ ἔτους Ἁθὺρ η. διέγραψε Σαβεῖνος Ζωσίμου γεωργὸς ιζ

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
ἄρτους,artos loaves, G740 Noun · accusative · plural · masculine
97× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word refers to bread, like the loaves Jesus multiplied in Matthew 4:3. It can also mean food in general or a loaf of bread, and is used to describe Christ as the bread of life in John 6:33.
Amplified meaning
bread, food
Tyndale gloss
bread
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἄρτος (i.e., *artos*) means bread or a loaf, primarily made from wheat. It is used in various contexts in the New Testament, including references to the bread of the Last Supper (Mt 26:26) and general food (Mt 6:11). The entries highlight its metaphorical use, particularly in relation to Christ as the 'bread of life' (John 6:35).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἄρτος, -ου, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for לֶחֶם;]

bread, a loaf: Mt 4:3, 4, Mk 3:20, al.; ἄρτοι τ. προθέσεως, bread of the setting forth, i.e. the shewbread. Metaph., ὁ ἄ. τ. θεοῦ, τ. ζωῆς, ref. to Christ, Jo 6:33, 35; in general, food: Mt 6:11, al.; ἄ. φαγεῖν (Heb. אֲכֹל לֶחֶם), to eat (MM, s.v.), Lu 14:1, al.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἄρτος, -ov, 6, (fr. APO to fit, put together, [cf. Etym Magn. 150, 36—but doubtful]), bread; Hebr. ὉΠ: 1. food composed of flour mixed with water and baked ; the Israelites made it in the form of an oblong or round cake, as thick as one’s thumb, and as large as a plate or platter (cf. Win. RWB. 5. v. Backen; [BB.DD.]); hence it was not cut, but broken (see κλάσις and κλάω) : Mt. iv. 3; vii. 9; xiv.17,19; Mk. vi.36 [T Tr WH om. Lbr.], 37 sq.; Lk. iv. 3; xxiv. 30; Jn. vi. 5 sqq.; Acts xxvii. 35, and often; ἄρτοι τῆς προθέσεως. loaves consecrated to Jehovah, see πρόθεσις ; on the bread used at the love-feasts and the sacred supper [W. 35], ef. Mt. xxvi. 26; Mk. xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; Acts ii. 42,46; xx. 7; 1 Co. x. 16 sq.; xi. 26-28. 2. As in Grk. writ., and like the Hebr. om, food of any kind; Mt. vi. 11; Mk. vi. 8; Lk. xi. 3; 2 Co. ix. 10; ὁ ἄρτος τῶν τέκνων the food served to the…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἄρτος is frequently found with καθαρός = ‘pure or ‘‘ white bread,” e.g. P Tebt II. 468 οἴνου κε(ράμιον) ἃ, ἄρτων κα(θαρῶν) ἃ (= 10 Choenices? Edd.). P Oxy IV. 736%6 (a lengthy private account, ¢. A.D. 1) ἄρτου καθαροῦ παιδ(ῶν) ἡμιωβέλιον) ‘pure bread for the children $ obol,” P Giss

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἄρτος (artos) — bread.

ἄρτος, ὁ,

cake or loaf of wheat-bread, mostly in plural, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄρτος οὖλος a whole loaf, [Refs]; collectively, bread, δούλιον ἄρτον ἔδων[Refs 7th c.BC+]; opposed to μᾶζα (porridge), [Refs 5th c.BC+] —Freq. in all writers.

II. ἄρτος· βόλος τις, καὶ ὁ Ἀθηναίων ξένος, [Refs 5th c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἄρτος

artos

from 142; bread (as raised) or a loaf:--(shew-)bread, loaf.

see GREEK for 142

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἄρτος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

bread, a loaf, food

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἄρτος artos 97x

bread; a loaf or thin cake of bread, Mt. 26:26; food, Mt. 15:2; Mk. 3:20; bread, maintenance, living, necessaries of life, Mt. 6:11; Lk. 11:3; 2 Thess. 3:8

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἄρτος Deriv. uncertain. a cake or loaf of wheat-bread (barley-bread is μᾶζα), mostly in pl., Od.; ἄρτος οὖλος soft bread, id. Od.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APM — Noun · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Smith's Bible Dictionary

[BREAD]

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Miracle of the five Mt 14:15-21; 16:9; Lu 9:12-17

→ Miracle of the seven Mt 15:34-38; 16:10

→ See BREAD

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
62%bread
bread62% · 61×loaves32% · 32×loaf3% · 3×other renderings3% · 3×

99 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object68%adverbial13%subject9%predicate8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 97 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,λαμβάνωI receive, take
πέντεIndec
Article theμήNegἔχωI have, hold, po
λαμβάνωI receive, take
καίand, even, also,ἐπιλανθάνομαιI forget, neglecαὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, because
λέγωI say, speakὀλιγόπιστοςof little faithἀλλήλων
ἑπτάIndec
Article the
ἄρτοςloaves,97×
what comes after →
Article the
πρόθεσιςthe show-bread, δέbut, on the otheτέκνονa child, descend
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theδίδωμιI offer, giveδύο
οὐNeg
ἔχωI have, hold, poλαμβάνωI receive, takeἀρκέωI am sufficient,
εὐχαριστέωI thank, give thanks
κλάωI breakArticle the
ἐγώ
Article theδέbut, on the othe

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἄρτος · 97× in the New Testament
John Matthew Mark Luke 1 Corinthians Acts 2 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians Hebrews
Across the New Testament9 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 149 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Ignatius of Antioch The Didache The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.81c. AD 40

ἄρτους γὰρ καὶ οἶνον προσφέρει, ἅπερ Ἀμμανῖται καὶ Μωαβῖται τῷ βλέποντι παρασχεῖν οὐκ ἠθέλησαν, οὗ χάριν ἐκκλησίας εἴργονται καὶ συλλόγου θείου·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.197c. AD 75–95

ἐπινευσάντων δὲ ἄρτους τε προσέταξεν εὐθὺς ἐκ σεμιδάλεως γενέσθαι, καὶ μόσχον θύσας καὶ ὀπτήσας ἐκόμισεν αὐτοῖς ὑπὸ τῇ δρυῒ κατακειμένοις·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.3c. AD 100

διάθρυπτε πεινῶσιν τὸν ἄρτον σου, καὶ γυμνὸν ἐὰν ἴδῃς περίβαλε: ἀστέγους εἴσαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκον σου, καὶ ἐὰν ἴδῃς ταπεινόν, οὐχ ὑπερόψῃ αὐτόν, οὐδὲ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκείων τοῦ σπέρματός σου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Athen.. 14Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 22

ἀρταβῶν εἴκοσι πέντε , πάσας δὲ μέτρῳ τετάρτῳ ἐκ πόρων καὶ θαλλοῦ κατʼ ἔτος ἄρτων ἀρτάβης μιᾶς , πάντα δὲ ἀκίνδυνα παντὸς κινδύνου, τὰ δʼ ἔργα πάντα καὶ τὴν

P.Mich. 2 126Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 46–AD 49

ἀπέχει τὸν φόρον καὶ βεβαιοῖ. ὑπογραφεὺς Σεραπίων Πτολαιμαίου. Σαμβαθ ἐπὶ Σαμβα … το … ἄρτοι ϛ. Θερμούθι α Ταορσεῦτι α Ταορσενούφι β ἑκάστῃ τῶν γραῶν α

P.Fay. 119Euhemeria (Arsinoites)AD 103

ἀλέκτορας δέκα ἀγοράσας καὶ εἰς τὰ γενέσια Γεμέλλης πέμψεις ὀψάρια καὶ … … καὶ ἄρτον πυροῦ ἀρτάβην α.

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
εὐχαριστήσαςeucharisteō having given thanks G2168 Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
38× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To thank means to express gratitude, as seen in Romans 1:21 and 1 Thessalonians 5:18. This word is about being thankful and giving thanks, especially before meals, as in Matthew 15:36 and Mark 8:6.
Amplified meaning
expressed gratitude, was thankful
Tyndale gloss
to thank
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word εὐχαριστέω, transliterated as eucharisteo, means to be thankful or to give thanks, particularly in a religious context. It is derived from the root related to gratitude and is commonly used in the New Testament, especially in relation to giving thanks before meals (e.g., Matthew 15:36). The entries indicate that it can also imply a sense of obligation or favor in earlier texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

** εὐχαριστέω, -ῶ

[in LXX: Jth 8:25 Wi 18:2, II Mac 1:11 10:7 A II Mac 12:31 R, III Mac 7:16 * ;]

to be thankful, give thanks (chiefly in late writers and Inscr.; cf. Milligan, Th., 5; Ellic. on Col 1:12; Lft., Notes, 9): Ro 1:21, I Co 14:17, I Th 5:18; of giving thanks before meat, Mt 15:36 26:27, Mk 8:6 14:23, Lk 22:17, 19, Jo 6:11, 23, I Co 11:24; c. dat. pens., τ. θεῷ, Lk 17:16, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εὐχαριστέω, -; 1 aor. εὐχαρίστησα (Acts xxvii. 35) and ηὐχαρίστησα (Ro. i. 21 GLT Tr WH; see reff. in εὐδοκέω, init.) ; 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. εὐχαριστηθῇ (2 Co. i. 11); (εὐχάριστος, q. V-) ; 1. to be grateful, feel thankful; so in the decree of the Byzantines in Dem. pro cor. p. 257, 2. 2. to give thanks (so Posid. ap. Athen. 5 p. 213 e.; Polyb., Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Epictet., al.; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 18 [W. 23 (22)]): τινί, esp. τῷ θεῷ, Lk. xvii. 16; Acts xxvii. 35; xxviii. 15; Ro. xiv. 6; xvi. 4; 1 Co. xiv. 18 [see below]; Phil. i. 3; Col. i. 3,12; Philem. 4; (τ. the acc. [hence as nom.] in the passive, iva... ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ὁ θεὸς εὐχαριστῆται, Philo, quis rer. div. her. 836). simply, so that τῷ θεῷ must be added mentally: Ro. i. 21; [1 Co. xiv. 17]; 1 Th. v. 18; esp. where the giving of thanks customary at the beginning of a feast, or in general before eating…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εὐχαριστέω was originally = ‘‘do a good turn to,” ‘‘oblige,’’ as in P Petr II. 2 (4)5 (c. B.c. 260) (= Witkowski?, p. 24) edxaptστήσεις μοι, ‘“gratiam meam merebis, gratiam tibi habebo,” 7b. 15 (3)7 (B.C. 241-39) τοῦτο δὲ ποιήσας εὐχαριστήσεις ἡμῖν, “by doing this you will oblige us” (Ed.), P Hib I. 665 (B.C, 228) ὥστε σε μὴ διὰ κενῆς εὐχαριστῆσαι ἡμῖν, “*so that you shall not oblige me to no purpose ”’ (Edd.), P Eleph 137 (B.C. 223-2) εὐχαριστήσεις οὖμ μοι σαυτοῦ τε 4 U εὐχάριστος ἐπιμελόμενος, ‘oblige me by taking care of yourself’’ (on the use of the fut. see Proleg. p. 177). In late Greek this passed readily into the meaning ‘‘be grateful,” ‘* give thanks ’’: cf. Lob. Phryn. p. 18 ‘‘pro gratias agere ante Polybium usurpavit nemo.” Thus we have P Amh IT. 133? (early ii/A.D.) πρὸ τῶν ὅλων ἀσπάζομαί σε kal εὐχαριστῶ σοι ὅτι ἐδήλωσάς μοι στὴν (1. τὴν) ὑγείαν σου, P Oxy I. 71}. 35 (A.D.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εὐχαριστέω (eucharisteō) — to thank.

εὐχᾰριστ-έω,

bestow a favour on, oblige, τῷ δήμῳ τῷ Δηλίων [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; τινι [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

2. to be thankful, return thanks, Decrees cited in [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς Αθηναίοις [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ἐπί τινι or περί τινος for a thing, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; especially to the gods, ἐπὶ τῷ ἐρρῶσθαί σε τοῖς θεοῖς εὐ. [NT+2nd c.BC+]:—passive, to be thanked, ηὐχαρίστηται κεραυνοῖς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to be received with thanks, [NT]

3. pray, τῷ θεῷ περί τινος [Refs 4th c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

εὐχαριστέω

eucharisteo

from 2170; to be grateful, i.e. (actively) to express gratitude

(towards); specially, to say grace at a meal:--(give) thank(-ful, -s).

see GREEK for 2170

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εὐχαριστέω

v.

I thank, give thanks

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εὐχαριστέω eucharisteō 38x

to thank, Lk. 17:16; absol. to give thanks, Mt. 15:36; 26:27; pass. to be made a matter of thankfulness, 2 Cor. 1:11

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εὐχαριστέω εὐχα^ριστέω, φυτ. -ήσω to be thankful, return thanks, ap. Dem.

from εὐχάριστος

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAP-NSM — Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
24%having given thanks
having given thanks24% · 9×i thank21% · 8×giving thanks16% · 6×we give thanks8% · 3×he gives thanks5% · 2×thank5% · 2×give thanks5% · 2×he gave thanks3% · 1×other renderings13% · 5×

38 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 13 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb82%adverbial18%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 38 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἰχθύςa fishποτήριονa drinking cupἸησοῦςJesus
ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, food
λαμβάνωI receive, takeἑπτάIndecArticle the
ποτήριονa drinking cup
λαμβάνωI receive, takeδέχομαιI take, receive,
ἐγώ
ὅςκαίand, even, also,
αὐτός
πούςthe foot
εὐχαριστέωhaving given thanks38×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπατήρfather, Father,
κλάωI break
καίand, even, also,
σύ
ὅτιthat, since, becκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἀλλάbut, except
ματαιόωI become vainκαίand, even, also,Article the
δίδωμιI offer, give
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεὐχαριστέω · 38× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Romans Luke 1 Thessalonians Colossians John 2 Thessalonians Acts Ephesians Matthew Mark 2 Corinthians
Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Didache Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn Noah's Work as a Planter 130c. AD 40

ἑπόμενοι δὲ ἡμεῖς αὐτῷ λέγομεν, ὅτι οἰκειότατόν ἐστιν ἔργον θεῷ μὲν εὐεργετεῖν, γενέσει δὲ εὐχαριστεῖν μηδὲν ἔξω τούτου πλέον τῶν εἰς ἀμοιβὴν ἀντιπαρασχεῖν δυναμένῃ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.193c. AD 75–95

καὶ Ἅβραμος μὲν ἐπὶ τούτοις εὐχαριστήσας τῷ θεῷ περιτέμνεται παραχρῆμα καὶ πάντες οἱ παρʼ αὐτοῦ καὶ ὁ παῖς Ἰσμαῆλος, οὗ κατʼ ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν τρισκαιδέκατον ἔτος ἔχοντος αὐτὸς ἐνενηκοστὸν πρὸς τοῖς ἐννέα διῆγεν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.1c. AD 100

Οὐκοῦν νοεῖτε, τέκνα εὐφροσύνης, ὅτι πάντα ὁ καλὸς κύριος προεφανέρωσεν ἡμῖν, ἵνα γνῶμεν, ᾧ κατὰ πάντα εὐχαριστοῦντες ὀφείλομεν αἰνεῖν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 8th c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD
O.Did. 322DidymoiAD 77–AD 92

Ἰούλιος Ἀντωνίωι τῶι ἀδελφῶι χαίρειν· ἐκομισάμην τὸν στατῆρα παρὰ Οὐαλερίου · λοιπόν, εὐχαριστῶ σοι. κόμισαι ὀβόλους ε παρὰ Κέλερος ἱππέως περὶ τοῦ ἡμιματίου τοῦ ἁλός. ἀσπάζου τοὺς

O.Did. 353DidymoiAD 77–AD 92

Ἑρέννις Λείβωνει τῷ ἀδελφῷ πλεῖστα χαίρειν· εὐχαριστῶ σοι πολλὰ παρὰ τῷ θεῷ. οἶδα πῶς με φιλεῖς. μὴ οὖν, ἄδελφε, ἀμελήσῃς μου

O.Did. 355DidymoiAD 77–AD 92

Μάξιμος Μ … τῷ ἀδελφῷ πλεῖστα χαίρειν· εὐχαριστῶ σοι, ἄδελφε, ὅτι ἐμέλησέ σοι πῶς τὸν χαλκὸν ἐκπράξῃς καὶ ἂν ἀναβαίνῃἸοῦστος, δὸς αὐτῷ

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
ἔκλασενklaō He broke [them] G2806 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
14× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To break, especially bread, is an act of sharing or distributing food, as seen in Matthew 14:19 and Mark 8:6. Jesus broke bread with his disciples, symbolizing unity and community. This act is still practiced today in many Christian traditions.
Amplified meaning
shared, distributed
Tyndale gloss
to break
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κλάω (klao) means to break, particularly in reference to breaking bread, as seen in several New Testament passages like Matthew 14:19 and 1 Corinthians 11:24. It can also metaphorically describe a violent death. The word is built from a primary verb form and has various grammatical forms noted in classical literature.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κλάω,

[in LXX: Je 16:7 (פּרם), al.;]

to break, break in pieces: of bread, Mt 14:19 15:36 26:26, Mk 8:6 14:22, Lk 22:19 24:30, Ac 2:46 20:7, 11 27:35, I Co 10:16 11:24; seq. εἰς, c. acc. pers., Mk 8:19 (cf. ἐκ-, κατα-κλάω).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κλάω; 1 aor. ἔκλασα; Pass.,[ pres. ptep. κλώμενος, 1 Co. xi. 24 RG (see below)]; 1 aor. ἐκλάσθην (Ro. xi. 20 L Tr); [fr. Hom. down]; Το break: used in the N. T. of the breaking of bread (see doros, 1), Mt. xiv. 19; xv. 36; xxvi. 26; Mk. viii. 6; xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; [xxiv. 30]; Acts ii. 46; xx. 7,11; xxvii. 35; 1 Co. x. 16; xi. 24; with εἴς twas added, a pregnant constr., equiv. to ‘to break and distribute among’ ete. (see eis, C. 1), Mk. viii. 19; metaph. τὸ σῶμα, shattered, as it were, by a violent death, 1 Co. xi. 24 RG. [Comp.: ék-, kata-KAdo. |

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κλάω. P Lips I. 3912 (A.D. 390) τύψας με [ἀν]ελεῶς κλά[σα]ς καὶ χεῖράν μου ws καὶ τὰ ὑπώπια (cf. τ Cor 957) ἔχω ad’ ὅλων Part IV. |

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κλάω (klaō) — to break.

κλάω [ᾰ],

__A imperfect ἔκλων (κατ-) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future κλάσω [ᾰ] [Refs 1st c.AD+]: aorist 1 ἔκλᾰσα, Epic dialect κλάσε [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, poetry aorist κλάσσατο [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—passive, future κλασθήσομαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist ἐκλάσθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect κέκλασμαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]aorist 2 participle κλάς (as if from κλῆμι) [Refs 6th c.BC+]:—break, break off, ἐξ ὕλης πτόρθον κλάσε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; break off the luxuriant shoots of the vine, [NT+4th c.BC+]

__A.2 Geometry texts, deflect, inflect, usually of drawing a straight line 'broken back' at a line or surface, κλάσαι εὐθεῖαν τὴν ΑΓΒ ἐν λόγῳ τῷ δοθέντι [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; ἀπὸ δύο σημείων τῶν B, E κλάσαι τὴν ΒΝΞΕ [Refs]:—more frequently in passive, [Refs 4th c.BC+].…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κλάω

klao

a primary verb; to break (specially, of bread):--break.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κλάω

v.

I break

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κλάω klaō 14x

to break off; in NT to break bread, Mt. 14:19; with figurative reference to the violent death of Christ, 1 Cor. 11:24

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%he broke
he broke33% · 5×having broken27% · 4×breaking13% · 2×we break7% · 1×being broken7% · 1×broke7% · 1×i broke7% · 1×

15 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb79%adverbial21%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 14 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
εὐλογέωI blessδέbut, on the otheπᾶςall, the whole,
εὐχαριστέωI thank, give thanks
καίand, even, also,ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, f
εὐλογέωI bless
καίand, even, also,ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, f
ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, food
πέντεIndec
ἱερόςa temple
Article the
κλάωHe broke [them]14×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
δίδωμιI offer, giveλέγωI say, speak
δίδωμιI offer, give
Article the
εἰς
Article the
ἐπιδίδωμιI hand in, give up,
αὐτός
τέDisj
κατά

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκλάω · 14× in the New Testament
Acts Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Luke
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Ignatius of Antioch
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 14.461c. AD 75–95

τοῦτο τὸ ἔργον μάλιστα τὰ φρονήματα τῶν πολεμίων ἔκλασεν καραδοκούντων τὸ μέλλον·

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 1.20.2c. AD 110

τῷ κατὰ σάρκα ἐκ γένους Δαυείδ, τῷ υἱῷ ἀνθρώπου καὶ υἱῷ θεοῦ, εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ὑμᾶς τῷ ἐπισκόπῳ καὶ τῷ πρεσβυτερίῳ ἀπερισπάστῳ διανοίᾳ, ἕνα ἄρτον κλῶντες, ὅς ἐστιν φάρμακον ἀθανασίας, ἀντίδοτος τοῦ μὴ ἀποθανεῖν, ἀλλὰ ζῆν ἐν Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ διὰ παντός.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Lips. 1 39HermopolisAD 390

ἑστίαν, ὡς ἐν βαρβάροις παρʼ οὐδὲν ἡγεῖται τὴν τῶν νόμων ἐπιστρέφειαν τύψας με ἀνελεῶς κλάσας καὶ χεῖρά μου ὡς καὶ τὰ ὑπώπια ἔχω ἀφʼ ὅλων τῶν ὠ

P.Oxy. 27 2479OxyrhynchosAD 501–AD 600

παρακαλῶ τοῦ ὑμετέρου ἐλέους τυχεῖν. μάρτυρα γὰρ ἐπικαλοῦμαι τὸν δεσπότην θεὸν ὡς ὅτι τὸ κλάσαι ἤτοι τὸ ξηρὸν ψωμίον οὐκ ἔχω φαγεῖν μετὰ τῶν ἐμῶν τέκνων προκειμένης ταύτης ἕνεκα

Aegyptus 32 (1952), p. 380Arsinoites (?)AD 601–AD 700

μετὰ πολλῆς παρακλήσεως … ἠθέλησεν ἀπολαβεῖν καὶ ἡ κύρα Εὐσέβια … ατη ἐκεῖ καὶ ἔκλασα τὰ πλοῖα καὶ με… ἵνα ἀποδιδῷ, ὡς ἐλάμβανεν. ἂν μὴ, κύριε, … ρας κάμνουσα

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
ἐδίδουdidōmi he was giving [them] G1325 Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · singular
414× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To give, as seen in Matthew 4:9 and John 1:12, means to bestow or grant something to someone, often with a sense of generosity or sacrifice, like God giving his only son in John 3:16
Tyndale gloss
to give
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δίδωμι, transliterated as didōmi, means 'to give' and is used in a wide range of contexts, including bestowing, granting, and delivering. It appears frequently in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 4:9 and John 3:16. The word is built from a primary verb and has various forms and constructions, indicating its flexibility in usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δίδωμι,

[in LXX chiefly for נתן (53 words in all) ;]

to give—in various senses, acc. to context—bestow, grant, supply, deliver, commit, yield: absol., Ac 20:35; c. acc. rei et dat. pers., Mt 4:9 5:31, Jo 1:12, al. mult.; c. dat. pers., seq. ἐκ, Mt 25:8; id. c. gen. part.. Re 2:17; c. acc. pers., Jo 3:16, Re 20:13, al.; δεξιάς, Ga 2:9; φίλημα, Lk 7:45; γνῶσιν, Lk 1:77; κρίσιν, Jo 5:22; of seed yielding fruit, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δίδωμι (διδῶ, Rev. iii. 9 LT WH; [δίδω Tr, yet see WH. App. p. 167]), 3 pers. plur. διδόασι (Rev. xvii. 13 [not Rec.]), impv. δίδου (Mt. v. 42 RG); impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐδίδου, 3 pers. plur. ἐδίδουν (ἐδίδοσαν, Jn. xix. 3 LT Tr WH [see ἔχω); fut. δώσω; 1 aor. ἔδωκα [2 pers. sing. -xes, Jn. xvii. 7 Trmrg., 8 Trmrg.; cf. reff. s. v. κοπιάω)], subjunc. δώσῃ [and δώσωμεν] fr. an imaginary indic. form ἔδωσα, [ Mk. vi. 37 T Trmrg.]; Jn. xvii. 2 (Tr mrg. WH δώσει) ; Rev. viii. 3 (LT Tr WH δώσει; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 720 sq.; B. 36 (31); W. 79 (76); [Veitch s. v. 618. fin., also Soph. Lex. s. v. and esp. Intr. p. 40; WH. App. p. 172]); pf. δέδωκα [on the interchange between the forms of the pf. and of the aor. in this verb ef. B. 199 (172)]; plpf. ἐδεδώκειν and without augm. [W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29)] dedaxew, Mk. xiv. 44; and L txt. T Tr WH in Lk. xix. 15; 3 pers. plur. δεδώκεισαν, Jn. xi. 57; 2…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δίδωμι structed by Kenyon, P Lond I. p. 2ff. For a specimen of their petitions see P Par 26 (B.C. 163-2), reproduced in Selections, p. 12 ff. It opens—Baordret Πτολεμαίῳ καὶ Βασιλίσσῃ Κλεοπάτρᾳ τῇ ἀδελφῇ, θεοῖς Φιλομήτορσι, χαίρειν. Θανὴς καὶ Taods δίδυμαι, αἱ λειτουργοῦσαι ἐν τῷ πρὸς Μέμφει μεγάλῳ Σαραπιείῳ κτὰ. From 20.15 Kal ἐκ τούτων καὶ τῶν προτοῦ γενηθεισῶν δ[ι]δύμων κομισαμένων τὰ ἑαυτῶν καθ᾽ ἡμέραν δέοντα, we learn that the Twins were there ex officio as twins, in connexion with some Dioscuric cultus: see Rendel Harris Soanerges, p. 272. From later documents it will be enough to quote P Oxy IIT. 533%® (ii/ili A.p.) εὔπατε Kal τοῖς διδύμοις ὅτι προνοήσζα]τε τοῦ κερματίου, “Ὑ16}1 the twins also to be careful about the small change” (Edd.). The frequency of Didymus as a proper name we compare the Latin Geminus and Gemellus (cf. for the latter the farmer whose correspondence at end…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δίδωμι (didōmi) — to give.

δίδωμι,

[Refs 8th c.BC+] (late δίδω [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; late forms, 1st pers. plural διδόαμεν see reading in [Refs 1st c.AD+]; but thematic forms are frequently used, especially in Epic dialect and Ionic dialect, διδοῖς, διδοῖσθα, [Refs 8th c.BC+], διδοῖ [Refs 8th c.BC+], uncertain in Attic dialect, [Refs 6th c.BC+], Epic dialect δίδωθι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; infinitive διδόναι, also διδοῦν [Refs 6th c.BC+], Epic dialect διδοῦναι [Refs 8th c.BC+], Aeolic dialect δίδων [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; participle διδούς, Aeolic dialect δίδοις [Refs 7th c.BC+]imperfect ἐδίδουν -ους -ου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Epic dialect δίδου [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἐδίδοσαν [Refs 8th c.BC+] codices (ἀπ-), also ἔδιδον probably in [Refs]; Epic dialect iterative δόσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future δώσω [Refs], Epic dialect διδώσω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; infinitive δωσέμεναι [Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δίδωμι

didomi

a prolonged form of a primary verb (which is used as an alternative in

most of the tenses); to give (used in a very wide application,

properly, or by implication, literally or figuratively; greatly

modified by the connection):--adventure, bestow, bring forth, commit,

deliver (up), give, grant, hinder, make, minister, number, offer, have

power, put, receive, set, shew, smite (+ with the hand), strike (+

with the palm of the hand), suffer, take, utter, yield.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δίδωμι

v.

I offer, give

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δίδωμι didōmi 415x

pluperfect, ἐδεδώκειν, to give, bestow, present, Mt. 4:9; 6:11; Jn. 3:16; 17:2, et al. freq.; to give, cast, throw, Mt. 7:6; to supply, suggest, Mt. 10:19; Mk. 13:11; to distribute alms, Mt. 19:21; Lk. 11:41; to pay tribute, etc., Mt. 22:17; Mk. 12:14; Lk. 20:22; to be the author or source of a thing, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δίδωμι Redupl. from Root ΔΟ, Lat. do, dare. Orig. sense, to give, τί τινι Hom., etc.; in pres. and imperf. to be ready to give, to offer, id. Hom.

of the gods, to grant, κῦδος, νίκην, and of evils, δ. ἄλγεα, ἄτας, κήδεα id. Hom.; later, εὖ διδόναι τινί to provide well for . . , Soph., Eur.

to offer to the gods, Hom., etc.

with an inf. added, δῶκε τεύχεα θεράποντι φορῆναι gave him the arms to carry, Il.; διδοῖ πιεῖν gives to drink, Hdt., etc.

Prose phrases, δ. ὅρκον, opp. to λαμβάνειν, to tender an oath; δ. χάριν, ῀ χαρίζεσθαι, as ὀργῆι χάριν δούς having indulged his anger, Soph.;— λόγον τινὶ δ. to give one leave to speak, Xen.; but, δ. λόγον ἑαυτῶι to deliberate, Hdt.

c. acc. pers. to give over, deliver up, Hom., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-IAI-3S — Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · singular
imperfect active indicative — a continuing action in past time.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-IAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
9%give
give9% · 37×do give7% · 31×given7% · 30×gave6% · 25×he gave6% · 23×has given5% · 22×will give4% · 18×i will give4% · 16×other renderings51% · 212×

414 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 86 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 414 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςκλάωI breakαἰτέωI ask, request,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godχάριςgrace, favor, kiαὐτός
ὅς
πᾶςall, the whole, ἐγώσύ
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδίδωμιI offer, giveκαίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
σημεῖονa sign, miracle,καίand, even, also,σελήνηthe moon
δίδωμιhe was giving [them]414×
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article theἐξουσίαpower, authorityκαίand, even, also,
Article the
μαθητήςa learner, disciἐξουσίαpower, authorityπνεῦμαwind, breath, sp
ἐγώ
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ἵναin order that, s
σύ
Article theἐνἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπερισσεύωI exceed, am lefζητέωI seek, search f

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδίδωμι · 414× in the New Testament
John Luke Revelation Matthew Mark Acts 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Ephesians Romans 1 John 2 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament22 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 985 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 45c. AD 40

Τῇ δὲ τετάρτῃ ἡμέρᾳ μετὰ τὴν γῆν τὸν οὐρανὸν ἐποίκιλλε διακοσμῶν, οὐκ ἐπειδὴ τοῦτον ἐν ὑστέρῳ γῆς ἔταττε, τῇ μὲν ἐλάττονι φύσει προνομίαν διδούς, τὴν δὲ κρείττονα καὶ θειοτέραν δευτερείων ἀξιῶν, ἀλλ’ εἰς ἔνδειξιν ἐναργεστάτην κράτους ἀρχῆς.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.20c. AD 75–95

οὔτε γὰρ αὐτῷ ποτʼ ἂν γενέσθαι νοῦν ἀγαθὸν τῷ νομοθέτῃ ταύτης ἀπολειπομένῳ τῆς θέας, οὔτε τῶν γραφησομένων εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον οὐδὲν ἀποβήσεσθαι τοῖς λαβοῦσιν, εἰ μὴ πρὸ παντὸς ἄλλου διδαχθεῖεν, ὅτι πάντων πατήρ τε καὶ δεσπότης ὁ θεὸς ὢν καὶ πάντα…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.7c. AD 100

ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

μέμ μοι ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι· ἐὰν δέ τι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω, καταλείπω καὶ δίδωμι τὰ ὑπάρχοντά μοι ἔγγαιά τε καὶ ἔπιπλα καὶ κτήνη καὶ ὅσα ἂν προσεπικτήσωμαι, τὸν

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

μέμ μοι ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι. ἐὰν δέ τι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω, καταλείπω καὶ δίδωμι τὰ ὑπάρχοντά μοι ἔγγαιά τε καὶ ἔπιπλα καὶ κτήνη καὶ ὅσα ἂν προσεπικτήσωμαι, τὸν

μέν μοι ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι, ἐὰν δέ τι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω, καταλείπω καὶ δίδωμι τὰ ὑπάρχοντά μοι ἔγγαιά τε καὶ ἔπιπλα καὶ κτήνη καὶ ὅσα ἂν προσεπικτήσωμαι Ταθώτηι

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
τοῖςho to the G3588 Article · dative · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DPM — Article · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
to the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
μαθηταῖςmathētēs disciples G3101 Noun · dative · plural · masculine
261× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A disciple is a learner or pupil, like the twelve who followed Jesus, as mentioned in Matthew 10:1 and Luke 8:9. This word is used to describe someone who follows a teacher or leader. It is often used in the context of Jesus' teachings.
Amplified meaning
learners, followers
Tyndale gloss
disciple
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word μαθητής (i.e., *mathetes*) means a learner or disciple, derived from the verb for learning, μανθάνω (*manthanō*). It refers primarily to a follower of a teacher, especially in the context of Jesus and his twelve apostles, but also applies to early Christians generally. The term appears frequently in the New Testament, notably in Matthew and Acts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μαθητής, -οῦ, ὁ (μανθάνω),

[in LXX only as v.l. (A) in Je 13:21 20:11 26 (46):9*;]

a disciple: opp. to διδάσκαλος, Mt 10:24, Lk 6:40; Ἰωάννου, Mt 9:14, Lk 7:18, Jo 3:25; τ. Φαρισαίων, Mt 22:16, Mk 2:18, Lk 5:33; Μωυσέως, Jo 9:28; Ἰησοῦ, Lk 6:17 7:11 19:37, Jo 6:66 7:3 19:38; esp. the twelve, Mt 10:1 11:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μαθητής, -οῦ, 6, (μανθάνω), a learner, pupil, disciple: univ., opp. to διδάσκαλος, Mt. x. 24; Lk. vi. 40; τινός. one who follows one’s teaching: ᾿Ιωάννου, Mt. ix. 14; Lk. vii. 18 (19); Jn. iii. 25; τῶν Φαρισ., Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. ii. 18; Lk. v.33; Moicéas, Jn. ix. 28; of Jesus,— in a wide sense, in the Gospels, those among the Jews who favored him, joined his party, became his adherents: Jn. vi. 663; νἱῖ. 8; xix. 38; ὄχλος μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, Lk. vi. 17; of p. αὐτοῦ ἱκανοί, Lk. vii. 11; ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν pad. Lk. xix. 37; but especially the twelve apostles : Mt. x. 1; xi. 1; xii. 1; Mk. viii. 27; Lk. viii. 9; Jn. ii. 2; iii. 22, and very often; also simply of μαθηταί, Mt. xiii. 10; xiv. 19; Mk. x. 24; Lk. ix. 16; Jn. vi. 11 [Rec.], etc.; in the Acts of μαθηταί are all those who confess Jesus as the Messiah, Christians: Acts vi. 1 sq. 7; ix. 19; xi. 26, and often; with τοῦ κυρίου added…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μαθητής. In a return of hieroglyphic inscribers, P Oxy VII. 1029%5 (A.D. 107), the tepdyAvdor declare on oath that the list is Part V. exhaustive, and that there were no apprentices or strangers versed in their art—opvvopev . . . μηδὲ ἔχει[ν] μαθητὰς ἢ ἐπιξένους χρωωμένους (/. χρωμ-) τῇ τέχνῃ εἰς τὴν ἐνεστῶσαν ἡμέραν. The word is probably to be read in BGU I. 3281. 84 (ii/A.D.). The distinction between μάθημα and μάθησις is well seen in PSI I. 948% (ii/a.D.) προσεδρεύει is τὰ μαθήpara: ζηλοῖ yap τὴν μάθησιν, ‘he is regular in attendance at his studies, for he is eager in acquiring knowledge”: cf. also P Oxy X. 12968 (iii/A.D.) ἀμερίμνη οὖν, πάτερ, χάριν τῶν μαθημάτων ἡμῶν, ‘do not be anxious, father, about my studies” (Edd.), 26. IV. 724° (A.D. 155) πρὸς μάθησιν σημείων --α contract of apprenticeship to a shorthand-writer, and from the inserr. /Mfde VII. 4497 πᾶσαν μάθησιν ὑμνοποιὸν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μαθητής (mathētēs) — disciple.

μᾰθητ-ής, οῦ, ὁ,

learner, pupil, τῆς Ἑλλάδος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of dancing, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: frequently in Attic dialect of the pupils of philosophers and rhetoricians, οὐ θέμις πλὴν τοῖς μ. λέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+] with genitive _of things_, τούτου τοῦ μαθήματος μ. a studentofit, [Refs]; μ. ἰατρικῆς a student of medicine,[Refs]; apprentice, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

μαθητής

mathetes

from 3129; a learner, i.e. pupil:--disciple.

see GREEK for 3129

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μαθητής, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

a learner, disciple, pupil

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μαθητής mathētēs 261x

a disciple, Mt. 10:24, 42, et al.

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μαθητής μα^θητής, οῦ, μανθάνω a learner, pupil, Lat. discipulus, Hdt., Plat., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DPM — Noun · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
90%disciples
disciples90% · 241×disciple10% · 26×other renderings1% · 2×

269 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject54%adverbial15%indirect object14%object11%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 261 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,
δέbut, on the other ha
Article the
ἄλλοςother, another, diff
Article theκαίand, even, also,δέbut, on the othe
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegΜωϋσῆςMosesἈριμαθαίαArimathea
δώδεκαIndec
Article the
μαθητήςdisciples261×
what comes after →
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, bec
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusὄχλοςa crowdδέbut, on the othe
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςἔρημοςdeserted, desolaτίςIrg
σύ
ἵναin order that, sοὐNegποιέωI do, make
καίand, even, also, nam
ἔρχομαιI come, goποιέωI do, makeεὑρίσκωI find

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμαθητής · 261× in the New Testament
John Matthew Mark Luke Acts

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Sacrifices of Abel and Cain 7c. AD 40

οἱ δὲ ἀνθρώπων μὲν ὑφηγήσεις ἀπολελοιπότες, μαθηταὶ δὲ εὐφυεῖς θεοῦ γεγονότες, τὴν ἄπονον ἐπιστήμην ἀνειληφότες, εἰς τὸ ἄφθαρτον καὶ τελεώτατον γένος μετανίστανται κλῆρον ἀμείνω τῶν προτέρων ἐνδεδεγμένοι, ὧν ὁ Ἰσαὰκ θιασώτης ἀνωμολόγηται.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.200c. AD 75–95

λίαν γὰρ ἦν περὶ τοὺς ξένους φιλάνθρωπος καὶ μαθητὴς τῆς Ἁβράμου χρηστότητος.

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 1.1.2c. AD 110

ἀκούσαντες γὰρ δεδεμένον ἀπὸ Συρίας ὑπὲρ τοῦ κοινοῦ ὀνόματος καὶ ἐλπίδος, ἐλπίζοντα τῇ προσευχῇ ὑμῶν ἐπιτυχεῖν ἐν Ῥώμῃ θηριομαχῆσαι, ἵνα διὰ τοῦ ἐπιτυχεῖν δυνηθῶ μαθητὴς εἶναι, ἰδεῖν ἐσπουδάσατε:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. BC
P.Mich. 3 170OxyrhynchosAD 49

λαύρας τῆς αὐτῆς Παρεμβολῆς· διὸ ἀξιῶ ἀναγράψεσθαι τὸν υἱὸν ἐν τοῖς τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους μαθηταῖς ὡς καθήκει. εὐτυχεῖτε. Δίδυμος σεσημείωμαι. ἔτους δεκάτου Τιβερίου Κλαυδίου Καίσαρος Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Αὐτοκράτορος μηνὸς

P.Oxy. 2 310 descr.OxyrhynchosAD 56

Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Αὐτοκράτορος, Παῦνι κ Σεβαστῆι. διαγεγράφηκεν ὑπὲρ γερδιακοῦ α ἔτους Τευμενούθεως Ἀπίων Τρύφωνος μαθητής, α ἔτους διὰ Θέωνος δραχμὰς δέκα πέντε, γίνονται ιε. Ἐπὶφ ι ὁ αὐτὸς Ἀπίων

P.Mich. 3 171OxyrhynchosAD 58

Ἀμμωνίου λαύρας Ἱππέων Κάμπου· διὸ ἀξιῶ ἀναγράψασθαι τὸν Ἀμοιτᾶν ἐν τοῖς τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους μαθηταῖς ὡς καθήκει. εὐτυχεῖτε. Ἰσχυριον σεσημείωμαι. ἔτους ε Νέρωνος Κλαυδίου Καίσαρος Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Αὐτοκράτορος μηνὸς

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
αὐτοῦautos of Him G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-GSM — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςof Him5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
ἵναhina that G2443 Conjunction
669× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'in order that' or 'to', showing purpose or result, as seen in Acts 19:4 and Romans 11:31. It's used to express a goal or outcome. In Ephesians 1:17, it's used to describe a purpose.
Tyndale gloss
in order that/to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἵνα is primarily a conjunction meaning 'in order that' or 'that,' indicating purpose or intention. It can also function as an adverb of place, meaning 'where' or 'whither.' In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, often introducing clauses that express purpose, such as in Matthew 1:22. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings or usages.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἵνα,

adverb (poët., Hom., al.),

of place, where, whither.

of circumstance, when.

Conjunction,

prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Ac 19:4, Ro 11:31 (?), Ga 2:10, al.);

c. optat. (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph 1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; v. Burton, § 225, Rem., 2);

c. subjc.: after a pres., Mk 4:21, Lk 6:34, Jo 3:15, Ac 2:25,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἵνα, I. an adv. of Place. fr. Hom. down, esp. in the poets; a. where; in what place. b. to what place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A. Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836; differently in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 186 sqq-.) thought he had found two examples in bibl. Greek, and H. A. W. Meyer agrees with him. The first viz. iva μὴ φυσιοῦσθε, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain thus: where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have leatned from my example to think humbly of yourselves) the one is not exalted to the other’s disadvantage; the second, iva αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε, Gal. iv. 17, thus: where ye zealously court them; but see II. 1 d. below. “ iva I. a final Conjunction (for from local direction, indicated by the adverb, the transition was easy te mental direction or intention) denoting pur pose and end: to the intent that; to the end that, in order that; ἵνα pn, that not, lest; it is used…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἵνα (hina) — in order that/to.

ἵνα,

adverb,

I. of Place,

I.1. in that place, there, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.2. elsewhere relative, in which place, where,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely in Attic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵ. ἡ Νίκη (i.e. ἐστίν) [Refs 8th c.BC+] [same place]; ἵν᾽ ἄν with subjunctive, wherever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; as indirect interrogative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. b after [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔμαθε ἵ. ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵν᾽ ἕσταμεν χρείας[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. c with Verbs of motion, whither, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. of circumstance, γάμος.., ἵ. χρή at which, when, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἵ. μὲν ἐξῆν αὐτοῖς.., ἐνταῦθα.. when it was in their power, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. ={ἐάν}, uncertain in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἵνα

hina

probably from the same as the former part of 1438 (through the

demonstrative idea; compare 3588); in order that (denoting the purpose

or the result):--albeit, because, to the intent (that), lest, so as,

(so) that, (for) to. Compare 3363.

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3363

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἵνα

Cj.

in order that, so that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἵνα hina 663x

that, in order that, Mt. 19:13; Mk. 1:38; Jn. 1:22; 3:15; 17:1; ἵνα μή, that not, lest, Mt. 7:1; in NT equivalent to ὥστε, so that, so as that, Jn. 9:2; also, marking a simple circumstance, the circumstance that, Mt. 10:25; Jn. 4:34; 6:29; 1 Jn. 4:17; 5:3

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἵνα Adverb,

of Place,

demonstr. in that place, there, only in Il. 10. 127.

relat., = ὅπου, in which place, where, Hdt., etc.;—so, ἵνα τε Il.; ἵνα περ Hom.:—c. gen., ἵνα γῆς in whatever part of the land, Hdt.; ἔμαθε ἵνα ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, id. Hdt.; οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ εἶ κακοῦ Soph.

= ὅποι, with Verbs of motion, whither, Od.; ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ ἥκεις Soph.

of circumstance, when, at which, Od.

Final Conjunction, = ὅπως, that, in order that, Lat. ut, Hom.:

with subj.,

after principal tenses of ind., id. Hom., etc.

after historical tenses, in similes, where the aor. refers to any possible time, Od.

after opt. and ἄν, ἔδωκε μένος, ἵνα γένοιτο she gave him vigour, that he might become, Il.

with opt., after historical tenses, Hom., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
56%that
that56% · 382×so that40% · 271×other renderings4% · 24×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial8%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 669 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
παρακαλέωI summon, entreaἐπιτιμάωI rebuke, chide,δίδωμιI offer, give
σύ
λαλέωI speak, sayδιάδίδωμιI offer, give
ἐγώ
δίδωμιI offer, giveὑπέρπερί
ἀλλάbut, except
αὐτόςκόσμοςthe world, univeἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
τίςIrgἐγώἱκανόςsufficient, wort
ἵναthat669×
what comes after →
μήNeg
Article theτὶςεἰς
Article the
γραφήa writing, passaχαράjoy, gladnessλόγοςa word, speech,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theσύαὐτός
ἐν
αὐτόςἐγώὅς
εἰμίI am, exist
μετάεἷςoneἅγιοςset apart, holy,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἵνα · 669× in the New Testament
John Mark 1 Corinthians Luke 2 Corinthians Revelation Matthew Romans Ephesians Hebrews 1 John Acts

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 300 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 15c. AD 40

ἑκάστῃ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν ἀπένειμεν ἔνια τῶν τοῦ παντὸς τμημάτων τὴν πρώτην ὑπεξελόμενος, ἣν αὐτὸς οὐδὲ πρώτην, ἵνα μὴ ταῖς ἄλλαις συγκαταριθμῆται, καλεῖ, μίαν δ’ ὀνομάσας ὀνόματι εὐθυβόλῳ προσαγορεύει, τὴν μονάδος φύσιν καὶ πρόσρησιν ἐνιδών τε καὶ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.71c. AD 75–95

ἵνα καὶ τῆς πλινθίνης ἀφανισθείσης ὑπὸ τῆς ἐπομβρίας ἡ λιθίνη μείνασα παράσχῃ μαθεῖν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ ἐγγεγραμμένα δηλοῦσα καὶ πλινθίνην ὑπʼ αὐτῶν ἀνατεθῆναι.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Edg. $1Alexandria259 BC–257 BC

καὶ θεῶν μὴ ὀκνήσῃς διελθὼν εἰς ἐμπόριον καὶ ἀγοράσας, οὐθὲν γὰρ ἄλλο ἡμᾶς ἐπικωλύει, ἵνα μὴ ὑστερήσωμεν τῆς ἐργασίας. τὰς δὲ τιμὰς τούτων λαβὲ παρὰ Ἀπολλοφάνους. τὸ γύναιον ἐπίτοκον

vestiges … ἵνα μηθὲν ἐν τούτοις ἀγνοηθῆι … … Ἑρμίαι τῶν διαδόχων καὶ ἐπιμελητῆι, παρὰ Δρύτωνος τοῦ

P.Bour. 11Pathyris89 BC

ἕκαστος τῶν παρὰ σοὶ σιτοποιησάμενος πυροῦ ἀρτάβην μίαν ἐν ἑτοίμωι ἔσται αὐτοῖς ὁ ἄρτος, ἵνα δὲ καὶ κριθὴ ὑπάρξηι ἐπιμε … … ηγησαιἐμμέτρως αἴτησαιἐμμε … … τησαι ἔρρωσο ἔτους

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
παρατιθῶσιν·paratithēmi they may set before [them]; G3908 Verb · second aorist · active · subjunctive · third person · plural
19× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To set before or present something, like food or truth, as in Mark 6:41 where Jesus set bread before the crowd to feed them. It can also mean to deposit something for safekeeping.
Amplified meaning
present, offer to, crowd, multitude
Tyndale gloss
to set before
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word παρατίθημι (transliterated as paratithemi) is composed of the prefix παρά (beside) and the root τίθημι (to place). It encompasses a range of meanings including to set before, deposit, and commit to someone's charge. In the New Testament, it is used in contexts such as serving food (Mark 6:41) and entrusting teachings (1 Timothy 1:18).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παρα-τίθημι,

[in LXX chiefly for שׂוּם;]

Act., to place beside, set before, c. acc. et dat.: of food, Mk 6:41 8:6, 7, Lk 9:16 11:6; τράπεζαν, Ac 16:34; pass. ptcp., Lk 10:8, I Co 10:27; metaph., of teaching, παραβολήν, Mt 13:24, 31.

Mid.,

to have set before one (Hom., Thuc., Xen., al.).

to deposit with another, give in charge or commit to (Hdt., Xen., Polyb., al.) : c. acc. et dat., Lk 12:48 23:46, Ac 14:23 20:32,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρα-τίθημι; fut. παραθήσω ; 1 aor. mapéOnxa; 2 aor. subjune. 3 pers. plur. παραθῶσιν, infin. παραθεῖναι (Mk. viii. 7 XG); Pass., pres. ptep. παρατιθέμενος ; 1 aor. infin. παρατεθῆναι (Mk. viii. 7 Lehm.) ; Mid., pres. παρατίθεμαι; fut. παραθήσομαι; 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. παρέθεντο, impvy. παράθου (2 Tim. ii. 2); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for DW; 1. to place beside, place near (cf. mapa, IV. 1] or set before: τινί τι, as a. food: Mk. vi. 41; viii. 6 sq.; Lk. ix. 16; xi. 6; τράπεζαν a table, i.e. food placed on a table, Acts xvi. 34 (Ep. ad Diogn. 5, 7); τὰ mapaτιθέμενα ὑμῖν, [A. V. such things as are set before you], of food, Lk. x. 8 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1,30); sing.1Co.x.27. ὍὌ. to set before (one) in teaching (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6,14; Sept. Ex. xix. 7): τινὶ παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 24, 31. Mid. to set forth (from one’s self), to explain: foll. by ὅτι, Acts xvii. 3. 2. Mid. to place down (from one’s…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παρατίθημι. For παρατίθημι in its literal sense ‘‘ place beside,” ‘‘ set before,” as in Mk 64! a/., cf. P Oxy II. 326 (c. A.D. 45) π]αρατέθεικα τῆι μητρὶ Φιλουϊμέν]ηι τὸ βροχίον τοῦ μέλανος (‘‘the ink pot”). A literary ex. is afforded by Menander Fragm. 146 p. 43— ὡς ἀμυγδαλὰς ἐγὼ παρέθηκα, ““when I had set almonds before you.” From this the transition is easy to ‘‘submit,’”’ ‘‘report,” ‘‘ bring forward by way of proof” (cf. Ac 178), e.g. P Tor I. 14-8 (B.c. 116) ὧν Kal παραθήσομαι ἀντίγραφα ἐπὶ τῆς καταστάσεως, P Oxy I. 33 versotl- 152 (interview with an Emperor—late ii/A.D.) 6 ἠβό[κατο]ς εὐθὺς δραμὼν παρέθετο [τῷ] κυρίῳ, ‘«the veteran straightway ran and reported it to his lord,” P Tebt 11. 2872 (a.p. 161-9) évét[v]xov τῷ στρατηγῷ π[α]ρατιθέμενοι . . . ‘‘they petitioned the strat gus adding astatement ...,’” 2d. 291% (A.D. 162) tat]r ἐστὶν τὰ πίερ]. τοῦ γένους παρατεθέντα, “this is…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παρατίθημι (paratithēmi) — to set before.

παρατίθημι,

Doric dialect and poetry παρτίθημι (late forms from παρατίθω [Refs]; 3rd.pers. singular παρτιθεῖ, παρατιθεῖ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: imperfect -ετίθει[Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist active παρέθηκα, middle παρεθέμην: perfect παρατέθεικα: in Attic dialect παράκειμαι generally serves as the passive:—place beside, πὰρ δὲ τίθει δίφρον [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc.; [εἰκόσι] κόσμον [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

__b. frequently of meals, set before, serve up, σφιν δαῖτ᾽ ἀγαθὴν παραθήσομεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; παρετίθεσαν ἐπὶ τὴν τράπεζαν κρέα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ παρατιθέντες the serving-men, [Refs]; τὰ παρατιθέμενα meats set before one (with or without βρώματα), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a sacrificial meal, σκέλος τοῦ πράτου βοὸς…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

παρατίθημι

paratithemi

from 3844 and 5087; to place alongside, i.e. present (food, truth); by

implication, to deposit (as a trust or for protection):--allege,

commend, commit (the keeping of), put forth, set before.

see GREEK for 3844

see GREEK for 5087

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παρατίθημι

v.

I set before, serve, entrust to

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παρατίθημι paratithēmi 19x

to place by the side of, or near; to set before, Mk. 6:41; 8:6, 7; Lk. 9:16; met. to set or lay before, propound, Mt. 13:24, 31; to inculcate, Acts 17:3; to deposit, commit to the charge of, entrust, Lk. 12:48; 23:46; to commend, Acts 14:23

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παρατίθημι poet. παρ-τίθημι 2nd sg. -τιθεῖς 3rd sg. -τιθεῖ imperf. -ετίθεις imperf. -ετίθει aor1 act. παρέθηκα perf. παρατέθεικα Mid., aor2 παρεθέμην epic part. παρθέμενος in attic παράκειμαι generally serves as the Pass.:— to place beside, Od., attic:—of meals, to set before, serve up, τί τινι Hom.; οἱ παρατιθέντες the serving-men, Xen.:—Pass., τὰ παρατιθέμενα meats set before one, id. Xen.

generally, to offer, provide, Od., Plat.

to place upon, στεφάνους παρέθηκε καρήατι Hes.

to lay before one, explain, τί τινι Xen., NTest.

to compare, τί τινι Plut.

Mid. to set before oneself, have set before one, Od., Thuc., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAS-3P — Verb · second aorist · active · subjunctive · third person · plural
second aorist active subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAS-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Subjunctive Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
11%i commit
i commit11% · 2×put he before11% · 2×they may set before11% · 2×they committed5% · 1×he laid5% · 1×setting forth5% · 1×being set before5% · 1×do yourself entrust5% · 1×other renderings42% · 8×

19 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 16 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
παραβολήa parable, compariso
ἄλλοςother, another,
ἵναin order that, so th
μαθητήςa learner, disciαὐτός
καίand, even, also, nam
παρατίθημιI set before, seδιανοίγωI open fully
οὗτος
καίand, even, also,μάρτυςa witness
Article the
ἐσθίωI eatπᾶςall, the whole,
παρατίθημιthey may set before [them];19×
what comes after →
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
Article the
ὄχλοςa crowdπνεῦμαwind, breath, spψυχήthe soul, life,
σύ
Article theἐσθίωI eatτέκνονa child, descend
καίand, even, also, nam
παρατίθημιI set before, se
πολύςmuch, many, often
περισσός& Adv

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαρατίθημι · 19× in the New Testament
Luke Acts Mark Matthew 1 Corinthians 1 Peter 1 Timothy 2 Timothy
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 12 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Giants 50c. AD 40

ἀνάγκη γὰρ ὑγιεῖ κανόνι τὰ παρατιθέμενα εὐθύνεσθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 4.184c. AD 75–95

ἄπειμι δʼ αὐτὸς χαίρων ἐπὶ τοῖς ὑμετέροις ἀγαθοῖς παρατιθέμενος ὑμᾶς νόμων τε σωφροσύνῃ καὶ κόσμῳ τῆς πολιτείας καὶ ταῖς τῶν στρατηγῶν ἀρεταῖς, οἳ πρόνοιαν ἕξουσιν ὑμῶν τοῦ συμφέροντος.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 26.10.6c. AD 140

προσκαλεῖται αὐτὰς ὁ ποιμὴν καὶ λέγει αὐταῖς: Παρατίθεμαι ὑμῖν τοῦτον ἕως ἔρχομαι: καὶ ἀπῆλθεν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
Chrest.Wilck. 176Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 60

ποιησαμένων αὐτῶν. ἐπεὶ οὖν καὶ αὐτὸ τὸ ἐλαιουργῖον συνεχυτρώθη καὶ ἠναγκάσθην δοκοὺς καὶ ἐρείσματα παρατιθέναι καὶ διετίαι ἀναγκάζομαι ἔξω τοῦ ἐλαιουργίου ὢν τοὺς φόρους ἐξ οἰκόθεν διαγράφειν, ἀξιῶ οὐκέτι

P.Vind.Bosw. 1Nilopolis (Arsinoites)AD 87

τάξεις αὐτῶν ἀλλʼ ἐπικρατεῖν αὐτοὺς κατὰ διαδοχὴν γονέων ἐπὶ τῷ ὡρισμένωι εἰσκριτικῶι ἀκολούθως οἷς παρέθεντο ὑπομνηματισμοῖς Τουλλίου Σαβείνου, τὰ δηλωθέντα διὰ τῶν ὑπομνηματισμῶν … αποδ … τὰ τῶν τάξεων

P.Hamb. 1 31 aArsinoites (?)AD 126–AD 138

ἐστὶν Παχὼν κζ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος … ἔτους Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Τραιανοῦ Ἁδριανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ. ἃ δὲ παρέθεντο δικαιώματα τῷ δεῖνι ἐπάρχῳ εἴλης Ἀπριανῆς, ἑκάστῳ ὀνόματι παράκειται. μεθʼ ἕτερα σελίδων … .

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίAnd8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
παρέθηκανparatithēmi they set [it] G3908 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · plural
19× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To set before or present something, like food or truth, as in Mark 6:41 where Jesus set bread before the crowd to feed them. It can also mean to deposit something for safekeeping.
Amplified meaning
handed out, served
Tyndale gloss
to set before
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word παρατίθημι (transliterated as paratithemi) is composed of the prefix παρά (beside) and the root τίθημι (to place). It encompasses a range of meanings including to set before, deposit, and commit to someone's charge. In the New Testament, it is used in contexts such as serving food (Mark 6:41) and entrusting teachings (1 Timothy 1:18).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παρα-τίθημι,

[in LXX chiefly for שׂוּם;]

Act., to place beside, set before, c. acc. et dat.: of food, Mk 6:41 8:6, 7, Lk 9:16 11:6; τράπεζαν, Ac 16:34; pass. ptcp., Lk 10:8, I Co 10:27; metaph., of teaching, παραβολήν, Mt 13:24, 31.

Mid.,

to have set before one (Hom., Thuc., Xen., al.).

to deposit with another, give in charge or commit to (Hdt., Xen., Polyb., al.) : c. acc. et dat., Lk 12:48 23:46, Ac 14:23 20:32,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρα-τίθημι; fut. παραθήσω ; 1 aor. mapéOnxa; 2 aor. subjune. 3 pers. plur. παραθῶσιν, infin. παραθεῖναι (Mk. viii. 7 XG); Pass., pres. ptep. παρατιθέμενος ; 1 aor. infin. παρατεθῆναι (Mk. viii. 7 Lehm.) ; Mid., pres. παρατίθεμαι; fut. παραθήσομαι; 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. παρέθεντο, impvy. παράθου (2 Tim. ii. 2); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for DW; 1. to place beside, place near (cf. mapa, IV. 1] or set before: τινί τι, as a. food: Mk. vi. 41; viii. 6 sq.; Lk. ix. 16; xi. 6; τράπεζαν a table, i.e. food placed on a table, Acts xvi. 34 (Ep. ad Diogn. 5, 7); τὰ mapaτιθέμενα ὑμῖν, [A. V. such things as are set before you], of food, Lk. x. 8 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1,30); sing.1Co.x.27. ὍὌ. to set before (one) in teaching (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6,14; Sept. Ex. xix. 7): τινὶ παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 24, 31. Mid. to set forth (from one’s self), to explain: foll. by ὅτι, Acts xvii. 3. 2. Mid. to place down (from one’s…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παρατίθημι. For παρατίθημι in its literal sense ‘‘ place beside,” ‘‘ set before,” as in Mk 64! a/., cf. P Oxy II. 326 (c. A.D. 45) π]αρατέθεικα τῆι μητρὶ Φιλουϊμέν]ηι τὸ βροχίον τοῦ μέλανος (‘‘the ink pot”). A literary ex. is afforded by Menander Fragm. 146 p. 43— ὡς ἀμυγδαλὰς ἐγὼ παρέθηκα, ““when I had set almonds before you.” From this the transition is easy to ‘‘submit,’”’ ‘‘report,” ‘‘ bring forward by way of proof” (cf. Ac 178), e.g. P Tor I. 14-8 (B.c. 116) ὧν Kal παραθήσομαι ἀντίγραφα ἐπὶ τῆς καταστάσεως, P Oxy I. 33 versotl- 152 (interview with an Emperor—late ii/A.D.) 6 ἠβό[κατο]ς εὐθὺς δραμὼν παρέθετο [τῷ] κυρίῳ, ‘«the veteran straightway ran and reported it to his lord,” P Tebt 11. 2872 (a.p. 161-9) évét[v]xov τῷ στρατηγῷ π[α]ρατιθέμενοι . . . ‘‘they petitioned the strat gus adding astatement ...,’” 2d. 291% (A.D. 162) tat]r ἐστὶν τὰ πίερ]. τοῦ γένους παρατεθέντα, “this is…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παρατίθημι (paratithēmi) — to set before.

παρατίθημι,

Doric dialect and poetry παρτίθημι (late forms from παρατίθω [Refs]; 3rd.pers. singular παρτιθεῖ, παρατιθεῖ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: imperfect -ετίθει[Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist active παρέθηκα, middle παρεθέμην: perfect παρατέθεικα: in Attic dialect παράκειμαι generally serves as the passive:—place beside, πὰρ δὲ τίθει δίφρον [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc.; [εἰκόσι] κόσμον [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

__b. frequently of meals, set before, serve up, σφιν δαῖτ᾽ ἀγαθὴν παραθήσομεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; παρετίθεσαν ἐπὶ τὴν τράπεζαν κρέα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ παρατιθέντες the serving-men, [Refs]; τὰ παρατιθέμενα meats set before one (with or without βρώματα), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a sacrificial meal, σκέλος τοῦ πράτου βοὸς…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

παρατίθημι

paratithemi

from 3844 and 5087; to place alongside, i.e. present (food, truth); by

implication, to deposit (as a trust or for protection):--allege,

commend, commit (the keeping of), put forth, set before.

see GREEK for 3844

see GREEK for 5087

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παρατίθημι

v.

I set before, serve, entrust to

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παρατίθημι paratithēmi 19x

to place by the side of, or near; to set before, Mk. 6:41; 8:6, 7; Lk. 9:16; met. to set or lay before, propound, Mt. 13:24, 31; to inculcate, Acts 17:3; to deposit, commit to the charge of, entrust, Lk. 12:48; 23:46; to commend, Acts 14:23

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παρατίθημι poet. παρ-τίθημι 2nd sg. -τιθεῖς 3rd sg. -τιθεῖ imperf. -ετίθεις imperf. -ετίθει aor1 act. παρέθηκα perf. παρατέθεικα Mid., aor2 παρεθέμην epic part. παρθέμενος in attic παράκειμαι generally serves as the Pass.:— to place beside, Od., attic:—of meals, to set before, serve up, τί τινι Hom.; οἱ παρατιθέντες the serving-men, Xen.:—Pass., τὰ παρατιθέμενα meats set before one, id. Xen.

generally, to offer, provide, Od., Plat.

to place upon, στεφάνους παρέθηκε καρήατι Hes.

to lay before one, explain, τί τινι Xen., NTest.

to compare, τί τινι Plut.

Mid. to set before oneself, have set before one, Od., Thuc., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3P — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · plural
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
11%i commit
i commit11% · 2×put he before11% · 2×they may set before11% · 2×they committed5% · 1×he laid5% · 1×setting forth5% · 1×being set before5% · 1×do yourself entrust5% · 1×other renderings42% · 8×

19 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 16 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
παραβολήa parable, compariso
ἄλλοςother, another,
ἵναin order that, so th
μαθητήςa learner, disciαὐτός
καίand, even, also, nam
παρατίθημιI set before, seδιανοίγωI open fully
οὗτος
καίand, even, also,μάρτυςa witness
Article the
ἐσθίωI eatπᾶςall, the whole,
παρατίθημιthey set [it]19×
what comes after →
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
Article the
ὄχλοςa crowdπνεῦμαwind, breath, spψυχήthe soul, life,
σύ
Article theἐσθίωI eatτέκνονa child, descend
καίand, even, also, nam
παρατίθημιI set before, se
πολύςmuch, many, often
περισσός& Adv

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαρατίθημι · 19× in the New Testament
Luke Acts Mark Matthew 1 Corinthians 1 Peter 1 Timothy 2 Timothy
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 12 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Giants 50c. AD 40

ἀνάγκη γὰρ ὑγιεῖ κανόνι τὰ παρατιθέμενα εὐθύνεσθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 4.184c. AD 75–95

ἄπειμι δʼ αὐτὸς χαίρων ἐπὶ τοῖς ὑμετέροις ἀγαθοῖς παρατιθέμενος ὑμᾶς νόμων τε σωφροσύνῃ καὶ κόσμῳ τῆς πολιτείας καὶ ταῖς τῶν στρατηγῶν ἀρεταῖς, οἳ πρόνοιαν ἕξουσιν ὑμῶν τοῦ συμφέροντος.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 26.10.6c. AD 140

προσκαλεῖται αὐτὰς ὁ ποιμὴν καὶ λέγει αὐταῖς: Παρατίθεμαι ὑμῖν τοῦτον ἕως ἔρχομαι: καὶ ἀπῆλθεν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
Chrest.Wilck. 176Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 60

ποιησαμένων αὐτῶν. ἐπεὶ οὖν καὶ αὐτὸ τὸ ἐλαιουργῖον συνεχυτρώθη καὶ ἠναγκάσθην δοκοὺς καὶ ἐρείσματα παρατιθέναι καὶ διετίαι ἀναγκάζομαι ἔξω τοῦ ἐλαιουργίου ὢν τοὺς φόρους ἐξ οἰκόθεν διαγράφειν, ἀξιῶ οὐκέτι

P.Vind.Bosw. 1Nilopolis (Arsinoites)AD 87

τάξεις αὐτῶν ἀλλʼ ἐπικρατεῖν αὐτοὺς κατὰ διαδοχὴν γονέων ἐπὶ τῷ ὡρισμένωι εἰσκριτικῶι ἀκολούθως οἷς παρέθεντο ὑπομνηματισμοῖς Τουλλίου Σαβείνου, τὰ δηλωθέντα διὰ τῶν ὑπομνηματισμῶν … αποδ … τὰ τῶν τάξεων

P.Hamb. 1 31 aArsinoites (?)AD 126–AD 138

ἐστὶν Παχὼν κζ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος … ἔτους Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Τραιανοῦ Ἁδριανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ. ἃ δὲ παρέθεντο δικαιώματα τῷ δεῖνι ἐπάρχῳ εἴλης Ἀπριανῆς, ἑκάστῳ ὀνόματι παράκειται. μεθʼ ἕτερα σελίδων … .

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
τῷho before the G3588 Article · dative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Mark as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DSM — Article · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

be-for': The translation of a great variety of Hebrew and Greek words. "Haran died before (the English Revised Version "in the presence of," literally "before the face of") his father Terah" (Ge 11:28). To be "before" God is to enjoy His favor (Ps 31:22). "The Syrians before" (Isa 9:12 the Revised Version, margin "on the east," as "behind," owing to the position of Canaan, relative to Syria, implies the west).

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
before the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And He directs the crowd to recline on the ground, And having taken the seven loaves, having given thanks He broke [them] and he was giving [them] to the disciples of Him that they may set before [them]; And they set [it] before the crowd.
ὄχλῳ.ochlos crowd. G3793 Noun · dative · singular · masculine
174× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Mark than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A crowd is a large group of people, like in Matthew 5:1 where Jesus taught the crowd. It can also refer to a riot or a class of people.
Amplified meaning
large group, assembly
Tyndale gloss
crowd
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὄχλος (i.e., *ochlos*) refers to a moving crowd or multitude of people, often implying a throng or mob. It can denote the common people in a political sense, contrasting with the elite. The New Testament frequently uses it to describe gatherings of people, as seen in verses like Matthew 5:1 and John 7:49. The entries do not present significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὄχλος, -ου, ὁ,

[in LXX for הָמוֹן (chiefly in Da TH), חַיִל, קָהָל, etc.;]

a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng: Mt 9:23, Mk 2:4, Lk 5:1, Jo 5:13, al.; pl., Mt 5:1, Mk 10:1, Lk 3:7, and freq.; ὄ. ἱκανός, Mk 10:46, al.; τοσοῦτος, Mt 15:33; οὐ μετ’ ὄχλου, Ac 24:18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, Lk 22:6; πᾶς ὁ ὄ., Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὄχλος, -ov, 6, in the N. T. only in the historical bks. and five times in the Rev.; asin Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. down, a crowd, i. e. 1. a casual collection of people; a multitude of men who have flocked together in some place, a throng : Mt. ix. 23, 25; xv. 10, ete. ; Mk. ii. 4; iii. 9, and often; Lk. v. 1,19; vii. 9,ete.; Jn. v. 13; vi. 22, 24; vii. 20, 32,49, etc.; Actsxiv. 14; xvii. 8; xxi. 34; τὶς ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου, Lk. xi. 27; xii. 13; or ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου, xix. 39; ix. 38; ἀπὸ (for 1. 6. on account of [ef. ἀπό, 11. 2b.]) τ. ὄχλου, Lk. xix. 3; ἡ βία τ. ὄχλου, Acts xxi. 35; πολὺς ὄχλος and much oftener ὄχλος πολύς, Mt. xiv. 14; xx. 29; xxvi.47; Mk. v. 21, 24; vi. 34; ix. 14; xiv. 43 [here T Tr WH om. L Tr mrg. br. oh. ]; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; ix.37; Jn. vi. 2,5; xii. 12 [but here Tr mrg. br. WH prefix 6; cf. B. 91 (80)]; Rev. xix. 1,6; with the art. ὁ πολὺς ὄχλ.» the great…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὄχλος. In P Petr II. 4 (6)!® (B.c. 255-4) an official complains that on his way to work he had been hustled, and that, if care is not taken, he will be assaulted—8ivdv γάρ ἐστιν ἐν ὄχλωι ἀτιμάζεσθαι, ‘for it is a dreadful thing to be insulted before a crowd” (Ed.), and in 26. 4.51}. 23 (B.c. 246) ἄλλος ὄχ[λος ἐστεφ]ανωμένος is distinguished from various officials. A striking parallel to Mk 15%® (noted by the editor) is afforded by P Flor I. 618 (A.D. 85) (= Chest. II. p. 89), where the Egyptian Governor addresses a certain Phibion, who had been tried before him, in the words—&g.os μ[ὲ]ν ἧς μαστιγωθῆναι. . . χαρίζομαι δέ σε τοῖς ὄχλοις, ‘you deserved to be scourged, but I hand you over to the multitude.” [Note the use of ὄχλος in the plur., as frequently in Mt (e.g. 42°), with apparently the same meaning as the sing.] A Gnostic charm of iti/iv A.D., P Oxy XII. 1478, contains the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὄχλος (ochlos) — crowd.

ὄχλος, ὁ,

crowd, throng, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄ. τῶν στρατιωτῶν the mass of the soldiers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὄχλῳ in numbers (for an army), [Refs]; οἱ τοιοῦτοι ὄ. undisciplined masses like these,[Refs 2nd c.AD+]; of the camp-followers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. in political sense, populace, mob, opposed to δῆμος (people), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δικαστηρίων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ὄ. and popular assemblies (in a contemptuous sense), [Refs 5th c.BC+] this is already in the mouths of the people, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

3. generally, mass, multitude, ὄ. τὸν πλεῖστον λόγων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵππων ὄ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in plural, the masses, καχεξία τις ὑποδέδυκε τοὺς ὄχλους [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὄχλος

ochlos

from a derivative of 2192 (meaning a vehicle); a throng (as borne

along); by implication, the rabble; by extension, a class of people;

figuratively, a riot:--company, multitude, number (of people), people,

press.

see GREEK for 2192

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὄχλος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a crowd

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὄχλος ochlos 175x

a crowd, a confused multitude of people, Mt. 4:25; 5:1; 7:28; spc. the common people, Jn. 7:49; a multitude, great number, Lk. 5:29; 6:17; Acts 1:15; by impl. tumult, uproar, Lk. 22:6; Acts 24:18

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὄχλος ὄχλος, ὁ, a moving crowd, a throng, mob, Pind., Aesch., etc.; ὁ ὄχλος τῶν στρατιωτῶν the mass of the soldiers, Xen.; τῷ ὄχλῳ in point of numbers, Thuc.; οἱ τοιοῦτοι ὄχλοι undisciplined masses like these, id. Thuc.

in political sense, the populace, mob, Lat. turba, opp. to δῆμος, id. Thuc., Xen.

generally, a mass, multitude, ὄχλος λόγων Aesch.

like Lat. turba, annoyance, trouble, ὄχλον παρέχειν τινί to give one trouble, Hdt.; δι᾽ ὄχλου εἶναι, γενέσθαι to be or become troublesome, Ar., Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSM — Noun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
60%crowd
crowd60% · 105×crowds31% · 55×multitude4% · 7×other renderings3% · 6×other renderings2% · 3×

176 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject55%object21%adverbial14%indirect object10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 174 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, δέbut, on the otheφοβέωI fear, am terri
αὐτός
ἀκολουθέωI accompany, attπρόςμετά
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theσύνειμι (II)I come togetherἀκούωI hear, listen
πολύςmuch, many, often
ὁράωI see, look uponδέbut, on the otheπάλινagain, further,
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςπεδινόςlevelχῆροςa widow
ὄχλοςcrowd.174×
what comes after →
πολύςmuch, many, often
καίand, even, also,ὥστεso that, therefoἀπό
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgοὐδέποτεNeg
Article the
ἵστημιI cause to standπροάγωI lead forth, goἱκανόςsufficient, wort
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakσπλαγχνίζομαιI have pity on
ὅτιthat, since, because
ἤδηnow, alreadyὡςas, like as, howἕξIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὄχλος · 174× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke Mark Acts John Revelation

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 17 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.76c. AD 40

διὰ τοῦτο καὶ τὸ λαῶδες καὶ ὄχλον ἔχον ἐν ἡμῖν μέρος,

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.336c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ Ἡσαῦς ἀσπασάμενος αὐτὸν ἀνήρετο τῶν παίδων τὸν ὄχλον καὶ τὰς γυναῖκας, ἠξίου τε τότε μαθὼν περὶ αὐτῶν τὸ πᾶν καὶ αὐτὸς συμβαδίζειν αὐτοῖς πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, Ἰακώβου δὲ προφασιζομένου τὸν κόπον τῶν ὑποζυγίων ὑπεχώρησεν εἰς Σάειραν·

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 25.1.16c. AD 140

ἕτεροι δὲ ἤρχοντο τὰς ῥάβδους χλωρὰς φέροντες ὡς ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου: τὸ δὲ πλεῖον μέρος τοῦ ὄχλου τοιαύτας ῥάβδους ἐπεδίδουν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. BC 3rd c. AD
O.Did. 341DidymoiAD 77–AD 92

ἐάν τι ἀκούσῃς περὶ ἡμῶν τῶν σουκεσσόρων ἀντίγραψόν μοι. ἐκόμισα κι… ον επεν… μὴ ὀχλοῦ … εραν

P.Oxy. 12 1481Oxyrhynchites (?)AD 101–AD 125

ἐλυπήθην ἀκούσας ὅτι ἤκουσας. οὐ γὰρ δεινῶς ἠσθένησα. μέμφομαι δὲ τὸν εἴπαντα σοι. μὴ ὀχλοῦ δὲ πέμπειν τι ἡμῖν. ἐκομισάμεθα δὲ τὰ θαλλία παρὰ τοῦ τοῦ Ἡρακλείδου. Διονυτᾶς δὲ

O.Claud. 4 889Mons ClaudianusAD 150–AD 154

τρεῖς. ἐὰν δὲ πέμπω ἕνα οὐκέτι ἔχω πέμψαι εἰς τὴν λατομίαν. οἶδας δὲ ὅτι ὄχλον πολὺν δαπανᾶ εἰς τὴν κατάστασιν. ἐγὼ δ …τα τὰ παρʼ ἐμε … … ηκα

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate